You are on page 1of 317

AD-0377 / Item number 0400151 /

DataChief C20

Alarm and monitoring system


with process control and
power management
Instruction manual

Document revisions
Rev

Date

Written by

Checked by

Approved by

02.02.2002

KGr

AHo

KOP

20.11.2002

KGr

AHo

KOP

05.02.2003

KGr

BW

KOP

The original signatures are recorded in the companys logistic database.

High voltage safety


warning
The voltages used to power this equipment are
potentially lethal. Even 110 volts can kill.
Whenever possible, the following precautionary
measures should be taken before any work is
carried out inside the equipment:
Switch off all high-voltage power supplies.
Check the operation of any door interlocks
and any other safety devices.
Completely discharge all high-voltage
capacitors.
It should be noted that interlocks and safety
devices are normally located only at regular
access points, and high voltages may be exposed
during dismantling.
NEVER WORK ALONE ON
HIGH-VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT!

FIRST AID IN THE EVENT OF


ELECTRIC SHOCK
Normally, even a high voltage electric shock will
not kill instantly. The victim can still be revived
even when his breathing and heart-beat have
ceased.
Could YOU save someones life? In the event of
electric shock, the correct actions, performed
quickly may well save the victims life. Make
sure you know what to do!
Immediate action
While shouting for help, remove the source of
power from the victim. Switch off the supply if
possible, or using a dry, non-conductive material
(rubber gloves, broom handle etc.) to insulate
yourself, separate the victim from the source. If
the voltage exceeds 1000 volts, switch off the
supply and be ready to catch the victim. Take
care- do not become a victim yourself.
Commence first aid on the spot. Continue to shout
for assistance till someone arrives.

Lay the victim flat on his back and loosen


any tight clothing (collar, tie, belt etc.).

Open his mouth and check for and remove


any false teeth, chewing gum etc.

Check if the victim is breathing. If not,


check if his heart is beating. The pulse is
normally easily found in the main arteries of the
neck, either side of the throat, up under the chin.

If his heart is beating but he is not breathing,


commence ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION. If the
victims heart is not beating, commence
EXTERNAL CARDIAC MASSAGE (ECM).
Continue to shout for assistance till someone
arrives.

EXTERNAL CARDIAC MASSAGE


1

Kneel beside the victim. Place the heel of


one hand in the centre of his chest, at a position
half way between the notch between the
collar-bones at the top of his chest, and the dip in
the breast-bone at the base of his rib cage. Place
the other hand on top of the first.

Keeping the arms straight and using your


entire weight, press down rapidly so that the
breast bone is depressed four- five cm, then
release the pressure. Repeat rhythmically at a rate
of one cycle per second. This will be hard work,
but keep going. His life depends on YOU. Do not
worry about breaking his ribs - these will heal if
he survives.

ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
1
Kneel besides the victims head. Place one
hand under his neck and lift, allowing his head to
fall back. This will lift his tongue and open the air
passage in his throat.
2
Place the palm of the hand on his forehead
to maintain the chin-up position.
3
Using the index finger and thumb of the
same hand, pinch the victims nostrils closed.
Open his mouth.
4
Take a deep breath and cover his mouth
with yours. Blow steadily into his lungs to expand
his chest. Remove your mouth from his to allow
the air to escape from his chest. You should be
able to see his chest deflate.
5
Repeat the inflation-deflation cycle at a
rate of about 12 cycles per minute till the victim
begins to breath normally again.

COMBINING EMC AND ARTIFICIAL


RESPIRATION
If you are alone, perform ONE cycle of artificial
respiration for every FIVE cycles of EMC. This
will be hard work, but keep going. His life
depends on YOU!
If there are other people available to help, one
should perform the EMC while one performs the
artificial respiration for every five cycles of EMC.
It will be much more efficient with two people.
Once the victims heart is beating and he is
breathing, roll him onto his side and support him
in that position. As consciousness returns he may
vomit, and this will allow any liquid to drain out
of his mouth.

Remove the victim to a hospital as soon as


possible, but do not interrupt the artificial
respiration and EMC cycles till his heart beat and
breathing returns.
If started quickly and performed correctly, the
resuscitation methods described will keep a
sufficient volume of oxygenated blood flowing
trough the victims body to allow full recovery.
Proficiency in the resuscitation methods can only
be achieved trough training. All personnel
concerned should attend courses on a regular
basis. Remember, someones life could depend on
you.

DO YOU KNOW WHAT TO DO?

Warnings and Cautions


WARNING

Lethal voltages
This system is not fitted with safety interlocks and lethal voltages
may be exposed when access covers are removed. Only persons
qualified and authorised must remove covers and these persons
should always take extreme care once the covers are removed.

WARNING

Fire
If a fire condition arises, emission of toxic fumes can be anticipated
from burning insulation, printed circuit boards, ETC.

WARNING

Health hazard
When cleaning the inside of this system, do not inhale the dust. The
dust is a temporary health hazard, depending on individual
allergies.
Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS disclaims any
responsibility for damage or injury caused by improper
installation, use or maintenance of the equipment.

Caution

Electrostatic sensitive device


Certain semiconductive devices used in this equipment are liable
to damage due to static voltage. Observe all precautions for
handling of semiconductive sensitive devices.

Note

This document
The information contained in this document is subject to change
without notice. Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS shall not be
liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential
damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of
this document. 2002 Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS. All
rights reserved. No part of this work covered by the copyright
hereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied without prior
permission from Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS.

Manufacturer

Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS


Bekkajordet 8 A
P.O. Box 1009
N--3194 Horten, NORWAY
Telephone switchboard: +47 33 03 20 00
Fax: +47 85 02 80 82
www.kongsberg.com

Purpose
The reader
This instruction manual describes how to use the DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring
system with process control and power management controls and display facilities. It is
intended for system operators. He/she should be experienced in the operation of Alarm and
monitoring system with process control and power management and have basic knowledge
of personal computers or should have attended a Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems
training course.
Note
Due to the flexible nature of DataChief C20 not all systems described in this manual are
relevant for all deliveries. DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with process
control and power management is a registered trademark of Kongsberg Maritime Ship
Systems. Windows NT and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Figure 1 DataChief C20 Remote Operator Station

Instruction manual

Chapters
1

Functional description
This chapter presents a functional description of the DataChief C20 Alarm
and monitoring system with process control and power management..
Refer to page 1.

Getting started
This chapter teaches you how to use the basic control functions of the
DataChief C20. It is intended for personnel just starting to use the system.
Refer to page 58.

Alarm and monitoring system


This chapter contains step by step procedures for operation of the alarm and
monitoring system.
Refer to page 82.

Process control system


This chapter contains a full descriptions of the process control system for all
all operator station types.
Refer to page 150.

Power management system


This chapter contains a full descriptions of the power management system for
all operator station types.
Refer to page 186.

Reference guide
This chapter contain software-- related information that can be reached from
one or several different types of operator locations (ROS, LOS etc.) .
Refer to page 214.

Maintenance
This chapter explains how to keep the system in good working order and what
to do if the system fails.
Refer to page 231.

Replaceable parts
This chapter contains a list of replaceable parts including part numbers.
Drawings of the main units are found here.
Refer to page 271.

Appendix
This chapter contains abbreviations and references.
Refer to page 288.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

IX

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Document history
The information on this page is for internal use.
Rev.A

First edition.

Rev.B

Included 6 months and yearly maintenance, ShipViewer user information, how to use the service console, procedures for unit replacement,
how alarms are printed after a blackout, how to configure a new DPU
channel and information about the new VCC, C3 and C4 Distributed Processing Units. Added section about password access. The manual is updated to comply with software version DC 60052.07.04.
Updated section about power management (AD- 0377 and AD- 0379).
Updated section about process control system (AD- 0377 and AD- 0378).
Added information about the Midi operator station. Included various
minor changes and corrections. Reorganized normal operating information under thee main headings; Alarm and Monitoring, Process Control
and Power Management System. Updated the parts lists.

Rev.C

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Instruction manual

Table of contents
1

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3
Design principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.2
Building blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.3
Decentralised system architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.4
Centralised operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4
System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1
Remote Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.2
Midi operator station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.3
Local operator station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.4
Watch Bridge Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.5
Watch Cabin Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.6
ShipViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.7
Distributed Processing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.8
Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5
Software components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.1
Humane Machine Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.2
System functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.3
Process control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.4
Power management system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.2
Operator Control Panel (OCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.3
Midi Operator Station (MOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.4
Local Operator Station (LOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.5
Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.6
Watch Cabin Unit (WCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.7
Remote Analogue Input (RAi--16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.8
Remote Analogue Input (RAi--10tc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.9
Remote Digital Input (RDi--32 & RDi--32a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.10 Remote Analogue Output (RAo--8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.11 Remote Digital Output (RDo--16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.12 Remote Input/Output (RIO--C1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1
1
2
3
3
5
6
8
11
12
14
15
16
17
19
20
26
29
29
32
35
39
44
44
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
48
49
50
50

XI

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

1.6.13
1.6.14
1.6.15
1.6.16
1.6.17
1.6.18
2

Remote Input/Output (RIO--C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Remote Input/Output (RIO--C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Input/Output (RIO--C4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

51
52
54
55
56
56

GETTING STARTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2
Using the Remote Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1
Understanding the Operator Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2
Systems without Operator Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3
Understanding the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
Using the Midi Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2
Understanding the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.3
Understanding the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.4
Menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4
Using the Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1
Understanding the Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2
Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3
How to access menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4
How to move between menu levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.5
How to move inside a menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5
The watch calling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.2
How does the Watch Calling repeat alarm feature work . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6
Using the Watch Bridge Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.1
Explanation of controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.2
How to adjust illumination for LED type panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.3
How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.4
How to test the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7
Using the Watch Cabin Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.1
Explanation of controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.2
How to respond to alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.3
How to adjust illumination for LED type panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.4
How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.5
How to test the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

58
58
59
59
63
64
66
66
66
67
69
71
71
73
74
75
75
76
76
76
78
78
79
79
79
80
80
81
81
81
81

XII

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Instruction manual

ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


3.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2
Remote Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1
How to handle alarm events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2
How alarms are printed after a black--out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3
How to display alarm summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.4
How to display alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.5
How to display alarm group information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.6
How to display counters and reset counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.7
How to display offscan alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.8
How to toggle between group and alarm display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.9
How to acknowledge alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.10 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.11 How to print a Complete log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.12 How to print an Alarm Summery log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.13 How to print a Level Correction log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.14 How to print a Tank log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.15 How to print a Counters log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.16 How to print an Inhibit log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.17 How to print an Offscan log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.18 How to print Group log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.19 How to print a Selected points log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.20 How to stop a printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.21 How to display system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.22 About password access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.23 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.24 Info field enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.25 How to enable changing of Eng. unit/counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.26 How to enable resetting of counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.27 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.28 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.29 How to silence the Operator Control Panel buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.30 How to set tags to offscan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.31 How to change alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.32 How to change alarm delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.33 How to access the Watch Calling configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.34 How to set the On Duty engineer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

82
82
83
83
83
84
84
84
85
85
86
86
87
88
89
90
90
90
90
90
90
91
91
92
92
94
95
95
96
96
97
97
98
98
98
98
99

XIII

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

3.2.35
3.2.36
3.2.37
3.2.38
3.2.39
3.2.40
3.2.41
3.2.42
3.2.43
3.2.44
3.2.45
3.2.46
3.2.47
3.2.48
3.2.49
3.2.50
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
2.2.9
2.2.10
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2

XIV

How to select the Watch Responsible location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


How to call the On Duty engineer or All engineers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to define the engineer qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to define watch calling Off--Duty mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to define Watch Calling panel groups for on duty engineers . . . .
How to change time zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to change system time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to make your own list of selected tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to change a list of selected tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to set the interval for selected points log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to make your own trend display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to make your own bargraph display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to change tag parameters for an analogue channel . . . . . . . . . . .
How to change tag parameters for a digital channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to change the Autolog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to change Deviation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Midi Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to handle alarm events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to display alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to display alarm summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to display alarm group information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to set the keyboard and screen configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to change access level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to display information about DPUs, tags and tag details . . . . . . .
How to change tag parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to change alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to change alarm delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to view alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to acknowledge alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to turn the sound off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to display and interpret alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to display and interpret alarm details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to display alarm summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Watch calling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to receive a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to respond to alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

100
101
103
104
105
107
107
109
110
111
112
115
117
120
121
123
126
126
126
127
127
128
128
129
130
134
134
135
135
135
135
135
137
138
139
139
139

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Instruction manual

3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
3.6
3.6.1
3.7
3.7.1
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.5
3.8.6

How to call the ON DUTY engineer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


How to transfer watch responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to accept watch responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Watch Bridge Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to display alarm information when in off duty mode . . . . . . . . .
Watch Cabin Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to display alarm information when duty mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using ShipViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main ShipViewer functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding the ShipViewer display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanation to the displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to print displayed information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to save ShipViewer images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to view saved mimic diagram files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

139
140
140
140
140
141
141
142
142
142
143
147
148
148

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150


4.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.2
About the process control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.3
Remote Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4.3.1
How to operate a pump starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4.3.2
How to operate a fan starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
4.3.3
How to operate a compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.3.4
How to open or close valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
4.3.5
How to operate a PID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
4.4
Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
4.4.1
How to operate pumps or fans from the Local Operator Station . . . . . 180
4.4.2
How to operate valves from the Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . 183

POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186


4.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
4.2
About the power management system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
4.3
Remote Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
4.3.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
4.3.2
How to operate a generator set with start/stop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
4.3.3
How to operate a generator set without start/stop control . . . . . . . . . . 193
4.3.4
How to operate a generator set without start, stop with adjustable load setpoint
194
4.3.5
How to operate the main switchboard controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
4.3.6
How to operate a bus tie breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

XV

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

4.3.7
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6

How to operate the one touch auto sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198


Midi Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
How to operate the main switchboard controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
How to operate a generator set with start/stop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
How to operate a generator set without start/stop control . . . . . . . . . . 209
How to operate a generator set without start, stop with adjustable load setpoint
211
How to operate a bus tie breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

REFERENCE GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214


5.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5.2
Tag type overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
5.2.1
Basic tag types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
5.2.2
Analogue out tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
5.2.3
Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
5.3
Alarm and monitoring parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
5.3.1
Analogue input tag items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
5.3.2
Alarm and event limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
5.3.3
Filter time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5.3.4
Dynamic deadband . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5.3.5
Scaling parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5.3.6
Counter input tag items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
5.3.7
Digital input tag items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
5.3.8
Exhaust mean value tag items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
5.3.9
Exhaust deviation tag items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
5.3.10 Common submenu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
5.3.11 Alarm submenu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
5.4
Engineers safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
5.4.1
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
5.4.2
Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
5.4.3
Remote Operator Station control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
5.4.4
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
7.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
6.2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
6.3
Unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
6.3.1
Recommended tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

XVI

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Instruction manual

6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.4
6.5.5
6.5.6
6.5.7
6.5.8
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
6.8
6.8.1
6.8.2
6.8.3
6.9
6.9.1
6.9.2
6.10
6.10.1
6.10.2
6.10.3
6.10.4
6.10.5
7

Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weekly maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6--monthly maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Yearly maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Remote Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to use the Service console program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to set up a Remote Operator Station from an image file . . . . . . .
How to shut down a Remote Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to replace colour graphics displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to replace printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to replace Operator Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to replace Remote Operator Station PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to install the Remote Operator Station software . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to install the Midi Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Midi Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to replace Midi Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Local Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to replace Local Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to recommision a Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the Watch Calling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting flow diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to replace Watch Calling units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Distributed Processing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to handle Distributed Processing Units error codes . . . . . . . . . . .
How to handle Distributed Processing Units communication errors . .
How to start or stop Remote Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to configure a new DPU channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to replace Distributed Processing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

233
233
233
235
235
236
236
243
245
245
246
246
246
247
250
250
251
252
253
253
253
255
255
256
256
257
257
259
262
262
263
265
265
269

REPLACEABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271


7.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.2
How to get in touch with us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

XVII

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
5

Consumable spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plugs and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

271
271
272
272
273
274

APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
5.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
5.2
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
5.2.1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
5.2.2
Alarm list abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
5.3
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

XVIII

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1.1

Introduction
This chapter introduces the DataChief C20 Alarm and
monitoring system with process control and power management.
The following subjects are covered:
- Overview
- Design principles
- System components
- Software components
- Technical specifications

1.1.1

Software version

This manual complies with DataChief C20 software version DC


60052.07.04.

Figure 2 Typical engine control room fitted with


DataChief C20.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

1.2

Overview
The DataChief C20 is an Alarm and monitoring system with
process control and power management. Modular design allows
flexibility in configuring the system to individual requirements,
covering the whole range from low complexity alarm systems to
highly integrated alarm and monitoring systems with advanced
process control. Sub-systems can include all or any combination
of the following:
Alarm and monitoring system.
Auxiliary control system.
Power management system.
Propulsion control.
Ballast automation system.
HVAC (air conditioning).
Management support.
Reefer monitoring
Fire system

Note

This document describes the DataChief C20 Alarm and


monitoring system with process control and power management.
The system is based on Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems unified
automation concept, where each individual ship configuration is
built up using standard modules communicating on CAN- and
local area networks. DataChief C20 is configurable for all ship
types, including oil and gas tankers, bulk carriers, passenger
vessels, container and Ro-Ro vessels, reefers and other special
purpose vessels.
The main purpose of the system is to give ships officers all the
basic alarms and status information they require in order to
maintain safe and efficient operation of the machinery and other
relevant equipment.
DataChief C20 complies with the requirements of IMO, local
maritime authorities, IACS, and eleven classification societies. It
is designed to meet the classification societies requirements for
periodically unmanned engine room operation. The system
conforms to all rules and regulations, and all modules are type
approved. The system incorporates the latest advances in hardware
and software technology. DataChief C20 is developed to strict
military QA standards.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

1.3

Design principles
1.3.1

General

Alarm groups

All alarms and monitored values are divided into alarm groups.
Any alarm can only be part of one group. Each alarm group has a
dedicated button on the operator control panel. If only standard
personal computer keyboard is provided the operator control panel
is displayed on the colour graphics display and works in the same
way as the physical panel. Active alarms are indicated by a flashing
light (unacknowledged alarm) or steady light (acknowledged
alarm).
Alarm types
Alarm detection for analogue signals

The following functions are included:


Instrument failure alarms.
Low-low process alarms with or without action (slow-down).
Low process alarms.
High process alarms.
High-high process alarms with or without action (slow-down).
Return to normal detection with dead-band to avoid alarm
fluctuations.
Adjustable filter factors to filter fluctuations in the incoming
signals.
Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages.
Alarm detection for on/off (two state) signals

The following functions are included:


High process alarms (open or closed).
Return to normal detection.
Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages.
Alarm detection for on/off signals with line check

The following functions are included:


High process alarms (open or closed).
Line broken alarm.
Line short alarm.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Return to normal detection.


Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages.
Inhibit alarm

Some alarms are conditional and will be inhibited when a specified


condition is present. This function is accomplished by defining a
signal as an inhibit source for a specified alarm or a specified group
of alarms. An adjustable time delay is available to extend the
inhibit situation for each signal.
Alarm indication

The four last alarms detected by the system will be indicated in the
lower right corner of the colour graphics display. The alarm tag,
description and state will be displayed. The following states are
used by the system.
On/off signal open contact alarm: OPEN
On/off signal closed contact alarm: CLOSED
On/off signal broken alarm: BROKEN
On/off signal short alarm: SHORT
Analogue signal instrument failure, signal value outside low
range: IFL (Instrument Failure Low)
Analogue signal instrument failure, signal value outside
high range: IFH (Instrument Failure High)
Analogue signal high alarm: HIGH
Analogue signal low alarm: LOW
Analogue signal high-high alarm: HI-HI
Analogue signal low-low alarm: LO-LO
On/off or analogue sensor taken out of scanning: OFFSC
On/off or analogue signal return from alarm: RETURN
To visually distinguish between the alarm states different colours
have been used. The meaning of the different colours are listed
below:
Normal state: GREEN
Alarm state, not acknowledged: RED with asterisk (*)
State changed from not acknowledged to normal: RED
Alarm state, acknowledged: YELLOW
Alarm state, inhibited: BLUE
Not updated or invalid values: GREY

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

Alarm and monitoring displays

There are several display pages for presenting alarms and


monitored values. The alarm pages comprise:
Alarm group display page (activated from group alarm
push-buttons).
Alarm summary page, containing a list of all active alarms.
Alarm history page, containing a consecutive list of
time-stamped alarms.
The monitoring pages include:
Group display containing a list of all measuring points within
an alarm group.
Selected points display (and logging facility).
Tag details, giving detailed information about each measuring
point in the system.

1.3.2

Building blocks

The DataChief C20 is a modular system that allows us to meet


individual ship owners requirements using standard modules. The
main building blocks of the DataChief C20 are:
Distributed Processing Units: Their main functions are to
monitor analogue or digital sensors and to provide analogue and
digital output to different devices. A number of different
Distributed Processing Units are available to meet specific
control and monitoring applications.
Remote Operator Stations: Their main functions are to
receive alarms and to allow monitoring and control of the
system. They can display mimic diagrams, allow control of the
Watch Calling System and printing of various logs. They also
enable the operator access to Distributed Processing Units for
inspection of variables, local operation of equipment
adjustment of parameters etc.
Local Operator Stations: Their main functions are to enable
the operator local access to Distributed Processing Units for
inspection of variables, local operation of equipment
adjustment of parameters etc.
Watch Bridge Units: Their main functions are to indicate
engine room alarms on the bridge while in bridge control and
to accept the transfer of machine watch responsibility to and
from the bridge.
Watch Cabin Units: Their main functions are to indicate
engine room alarms in the engineer on dutys cabin and in the
public quarters while in bridge control.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Dual redundant Local Area Network: Used


communication between the Remote Operator Stations
other PC based equipment. Each unit is connected to
completely separate Local Area Networks (LAN)
maximum redundancy.

for
and
two
for

Dual redundant CAN-bus: Used for communication between


the Distributed Processing Units. Each unit is connected to two
completely separate CAN-buses (CAN - Control Area
Network) for maximum redundancy.
Dual Process Segment Controller: The dPSC is a dual two
channel CAN gateway. In most cases the two channels are
working in parallel on redundant CAN lines. The main
functions are to process messages from the a local CAN-bus
segment and send them on the global process bus, where they
are available for other dPSCs and System Gateways.
Process Segment Starcoupler: Used to segment the CAN-bus
so that a short circuit or broken line in one segment will not
affect the functions in the other segments.
System Gateway: Connects two CAN lines to two Local Area
Network lines. The main purpose is to receive messages from
the two process buses running CAN, and update the Remote
Operator Station database.
Different selections of these units are used to configure each
C20
is
a
fully
individual
system.
DataChief
microprocessor-based system. It is decentralised for safety and
ease of installation but operation is centralised using Remote
Operator Stations (ROS). Each or a group of Distributed
Processing Units can be connected to a Local Operator Station
(LOS) containing display and keyboard for back-up/local
operation.

1.3.3

Decentralised system architecture

The heart of the system is a small family of different intelligent I/O


units called Distributed Processing Units. These communicate
with each other on a redundant high capacity process-bus. All
monitoring and automation functions are carried out by the
Distributed Processing Units, while the centralised Remote
Operator Stations provide the Human Machine Interface.
Each Distributed Processing Unit type has a specific capacity in
number and type of analogue or digital input and output channels.
The number of channels varies from 8 to 32.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

To configure the tasks for a specific Distributed Processing Unit


the appropriate software and parameters are downloaded into the
unit. This allows some Distributed Processing Units to perform
alarm functions, some control functions, some safety, or any
combination of these. This makes it easy to separate automation
system functions.
The process-bus used for communication between the Distributed
Processing Units in the DataChief C20 is the Controller Area
Network (CAN) bus. The CAN-bus has a very high reliability. For
systems with a high number of Distributed Processing Units or for
other design reasons, System Gateways (SGW) may be added to
the CAN network. These units provide the necessary segregation
of the automation system between for instance the different
sections of an alarm and monitoring system. The System Gateways
do not lower system performance or limit the possibilities for
locating operator stations.
The DataChief C20 is designed to accept both a grounded or
a floating earth installation. The latter installation method is
required by SOLAS Regulation 45 for some vessels types.
Floating earth allows coexistence with other systems, and ground
leakage detection.

ACCOMODATION

WHEELHOUSE

Fleetmaster

ROS

ENGINE CONTROL ROOM


ROS

ROS

ROS

ROS

ROS

300 KW

21
BUZZER

WBU

WCU

WCU

PRINTER

PRINTER

WCU

PRINTER

HUB

DUAL LAN

HUB

WCU
VA
C

VA
C

VA
C

24 V

WCU
M GE

1 - nn
DPU

DUAL CAN

UPS 220 VAC

M GE

M GE

UPS 220 VAC

UPS 220 VAC

UPS 24 VDC

1-- nn

INSTR.DRIV.

DPU

START

INSTR.DRIV.

DUAL CAN

PROCESS AREA

DPU
ROT. LIGHT/
KLAXON

dPSC
Gateway

RESET

RESET

RESET

RESET

RESET

LOS
DPU

dPSC

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

LOS

RESET

BUZZER

1 x 8 DPU CABINET

18 x 8 DPU CABINET

W/dPSC

LOS

LOS

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

dPSC

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

dPSC

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU
2 x 16 DPU CABINET
7 x 16 DPU CABINET

DPU

1 x 8 DPU CABINET

1 x 8 DPU CABINET

LOS

LOS

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

dPSC
DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU
W/dPSC

1 x 16 DPU CABINET

W/dPSC

DPU
8 x 16 DPU CABINET

DPU
DPU
W/dPSC

Figure 3 Typical configuration drawing for a passenger vessel.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

The Distributed Processing Units have been designed for


immunity against single failures. Each Distributed Processing Unit
has an internal three way galvanic isolation between power,
communication and input/output channels. If a unit fails this will
not affect the power source, communication bus or damage the
sensors. The Built In System Test will detect the error and warn the
operator. Failures to the process-bus, cabling or connected sensors
will also be detected by the Built In System Test.
Exchange of a faulty Distributed Processing Unit can be done
without turning the power off the DataChief C20. The procedure
is simply to disconnect and remove the faulty unit and then mount
and connect a replacement. The operator then requests the system
to replace the module, software is automatically downloaded and
the Distributed Processing Unit starts operating.
All Distributed Processing Unit types have been qualified
according to the latest revision of the IACS E10 test procedure,
satisfying the requirements for placement in the most demanding
locations. All Distributed Processing Units can be mounted
directly on diesel engines or similar locations without shock
absorbers. Only Ingress Protection (IP) may be needed. The
Distributed Processing Units are CE marked as required for some
European Union flagstate vessels. They also meet the
requirements to use the Wheel Mark defined by the European
Union Maritime Directive (EMD), satisfying all the new
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements.

1.3.4

Centralised operation

DataChief C20 is operated through a number of Remote Operator


Stations. These are normally located in the Engine Control Room.
Additional stations may be located in the wheelhouse, cargo
control room, damage control room, ships office or other parts of
the vessel. The Remote Operator Stations are normally connected
to the Distributed Processing Units trough a Dual Redundant
Control Area Network.
The Remote Operator Stations are fitted with colour graphic
displays and are operated either using a standard PC keyboard and
mouse or through a purpose built Operator Control Panel.
The Remote Operator Stations provides the operator with a
number of standard display pictures containing information about
the engine and surrounding equipment. Control of any of the
Distributed Processing Units can be performed from the Remote
Operator Stations. Full monitoring and alarm facilities are
provided in both machinery space and Engine Control Room.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

Advanced facilities can also be provided for unmanned machinery


space, and the watch-calling system allows automatic calling of
duty engineers. This allows both machinery space and engine
control room to be safely left unmanned, while the machinery
watch is carried out from the bridge.
All Remote Operator Stations are Windows based personal
computers; type approved for maritime use. They work in parallel;
none of them acts as master. All are interconnected via dual
redundant local area network. Although every Remote Operator
Station is identical, access to vital functions may be configured
differently. The control availability is defined by extensive use of
software password access. Some Remote Operator Stations such
as units located in the ship office are normally used for monitoring
only. These units will not allow acknowledgement of alarms or
execution of control commands. All general information such as
monitoring of alarms, trends and graphics are available for
inspection.
Changing a limit or parameter on one Remote Operator Station
will automatically update all other stations. All operator actions
such as the starting or stopping of a pump or the changing of an
alarm limit are logged and time tagged (optional).
When ever a variable or state changes significantly the Distributed
Processing Units updates the database in each of the Remote
Operator Stations. This means that data displayed at any Remote
Operator Station is always up-to-date. There is no need to request
data each time the operator wishes to inspect a variable. As a result
of this, the data traffic on the process bus and the Local Area
Network is kept to a minimum, giving extremely fast data access.
The Remote Operator Station serves as the database host for
process data, engineering data and software. Software for Remote
Operator Stations and the different Distributed Processing Units
are stored here. They include functions for automatic down
loading of parameters to the Distributed Processing Units at
commissioning time or when a Distributed Processing Unit is
replaced.
Configuration control of DataChief C20 systems is taken care of
by an automatic version update at any change of the engineering
database or the application software. The system logs all changes
made. Version numbers and additional information can at any time
be individually inspected for each DataChief C20, as required by
the major classification societies. Our commissioning editor
Tools is used to configure or modify the functionality of the
DataChief C20 and is used to generate as built documentation.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

The local area network included as part of DataChief C20 can


interface with personal computers for remote monitoring and even
with other external computer systems. The following drawings
gives a configuration example:
ACCOMODATION

CHIEF ENGINEER ROOM

WHEELHOUSE

ENGINE CONTROL ROOM

Fleetm aster

ROS
300 KW

21

WBU
LOS

BUZZER

WCU
WCU 16 group

PRINTER
WCU 16 group
WCU 16 group

WCU 16 group

WCU 16 group
1 - nn
WCU 16 group

VA
C

1-- nn

DPU

DPU

INSTR.DRIV.

INSTR.DRIV.

24 V

24 V

MGE

WCU 16 group
WCU 16 group

UPS 220 VAC

UPS 24 VDC

UPS 24 VDC

DUAL CAN

START

PROCESS AREA

DPU
ROT. LIGHT/
KLAXON

RESET

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

RESET
N x 3 DPU CABINET

N x 3 DPU CABINET

N x 3 DPU CABINET

DPU
N x 4 DPU CABINET

RESET

RESET

BUZZER

10

Figure 4 Configuration drawing for an oil tanker.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

1.4

System components
The following pages contains a description of each of the main
system components of the DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring
system with process control and power management.
The following system components are described:
- Remote operator station
- Local Operator Stations
- Watch Bridge Unit
- Watch Cabin Unit
- Distributed Processing Units
- Gateways

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

11

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

1.4.1

Remote Operator Station

Figure 5 Remote Operator Station (ROS)


The Remote Operator Station is a type approved personal
computer, connected to a colour graphics display and a printer.
Operator input is either done through a standard personal computer
keyboard or through our custom made Operator Control Panel.
The Operator Control Panel is a specially designed keyboard that
provides easy access to the different operator functions. It is
divided into separate function areas. Buttons are combined with
lamps to indicate alarms, status of the Extended Alarm System and
to indicate main system functions. The Operator Control Panel is
in many cases connected to an external sound off button.
The Remote Operator Station can be supplied with a printer (for
on demand printing), an alarm printer, log printer or colour hard
copy unit. When a Distributed Process Unit detects an alarm
condition, the alarm is identified by a flashing indicator on the
Operator Control Panel. The alarm is also displayed on the colour
graphics display, a buzzer is turned on and the Alarm Printer
automatically prints the alarm. By pressing the button associated
with the flashing indicator more detailed alarm information is
displayed on the colour graphics display.

12

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

Detailed sensor information for any Distributed Process Unit, such


as alarm or normal status data, can also be shown on the colour
graphics display, or printed on demand. Analogue sensor data can
be presented as a bargraph or a trend curve. Selected sensor data
may be printed automatically at fixed intervals. The system can
display the latest alarms for each alarm group individually or all
active alarms.
The logging printer and the colour graphics display records all
status changes, such as alarm acknowledgements and alarm
condition cleared. When all alarm conditions are cleared, the
system returns to normal.
Alarm limits and delays are adjustable from the Operator Control
Panel. A counter function keeps track of running hours for engines,
pumps and related items. This function can also accumulate flow.
Counter values are shown on the colour graphics display or may
be printed.
The Remote Operator Station is used when transferring machinery
watch responsibility between bridge and engine control room.
Selecting the engineer for watch-call duty is carried out from here,
and all available engineers, whether on duty or not, may be called
to the engine control room in the case of an emergency.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

13

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

1.4.2

Midi operator station

Figure 6 Midi Operator Station (MOS).


The Midi Operator Station is a multipurpose operator station
designed to be placed anywhere on the ship, even out on deck. It
allows alarm indication, process control and power management.
Operation is performed through a set of function keys and a high
resolution colour graphical display. For small alarm systems it can
be the only operator station. The Midi Operator Station contains
a symbol library for presentation of process control equipment and
use these to display mimic diagrams. The Midi Operator Station
gives the operator the possibility to:
Monitor the status of any object, from a single input signal to
a controllable object.
Be informed of any process- or system alarm, through visual
and audible signals.
Interface to a printer for alarm loging purposes.
Control the process through built-in pushbuttons and graphical
feedback.
Reconfigure the distributed database located in the Distributed
Processing Units, through numeric and alphanumeric inputs.

14

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

1.4.3

Local operator station

Figure 7 Local Operator Station (LOS).


The Local Operator Station is an optional operator control panel.
It includes a four line by 40 characters Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD display) and push-buttons for operator interaction. It is used
to allow local access to the Distributed Processing Units for
inspection of process variables, local operation of equipment,
simulation of input/output signals, adjustment of parameters and
inspection of the built-in diagnostics.
All Distributed Processing Units connected to the same CAN-bus
as the Local Operator Station are accessible. As soon as connection
is established, the Local Operator Station is able to control the
selected Distributed Processing Unit. The dialogues are defined by
the functionality of each individual type of Distributed Processing
Unit.
If a Distributed Processing Unit is isolated from the rest of the
system because of a communication break-down, or because the
Remote Operator Station has developed a serious fault, all the
necessary alarm and monitoring functions can as an option be
available locally. Detailed information on the type of alarm and its
source is then available at the Local Operator Station.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

15

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

1.4.4

Watch Bridge Unit

Figure 8 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU), LCD type.


Two different types of Watch Bridge Units exist, an LED and a
LCD type. Both are used to indicate and accept the transfer of
machine watch responsibility between bridge and engine control
room. The LED type has more alarm indicators and the LCD type
has a display to show alarms in clear text.

Figure 9 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU), LED type.

16

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

When the bridge has the machinery watch responsibility, one or


more engineers must be on call. A general alarm signal will call
them to the engine control room if an alarm condition arises. The
alarm indication on the Watch Bridge Unit is that a buzzer sounds
and a single or group alarm lamp is flashing. When an alarm is
acknowledged in the engine control room, or the situation is
cleared, appropriate indications are given on the Watch Bridge
Unit.
The DataChief C20 prevents the bridge from assuming watch
responsibility if no engineers are assigned to on call duty. The
bridge personnel may call the engineers on-duty in their quarters
at any time, for consultation etc. Acknowledgement of such calls
are provided.
Alarm indication can be provided when the bridge is not having the
machinery watch. Indicators show when an alarm has been
acknowledged in the engine control room but the buzzer is not
sounded.

1.4.5

Watch Cabin Unit

Figure 10 Watch Cabin Unit (WBU), LCD type.


Two different types of Watch Cabin Units exist, an LED and a
LCD version. Both are used to indicate engine room alarms. They
are placed in the engineers cabins and in public areas. The LED
type has more alarm indicators and the LCD type has a display to
show alarms in clear text.
To set the machinery watch responsibility system to bridge mode
one or more engineers must be on call. When an alarm condition
arise a general alarm signal is sounded in the duty engineers cabins
and in the public areas. The visual alarm indication on the Watch
Cabin Unit consists of single or group alarm lamps.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

17

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Figure 11 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU), LED type.


When the bridge has the machinery watch responsibility, one or
more engineers must be on call. When an alarm situation occur the
alarm signal will be given, both in the duty-engineers cabin and in
the public areas. The visual alarm indication on the Watch Cabin
Units are that a buzzer sounds and a single or group alarm lamp is
flashing. The engineer will then normally go to the engine control
room to find the cause of the alarm. When the alarm is
acknowledged in the engine control room, or the situation is
cleared, the alarm condition is cleared from the Watch Cabin Units.
If the engineer does not acknowledge within a specified period of
time, the alarm signal is repeated in the engineers quarters, and on
the bridge, until it is acknowledged. The system can also be used
to call an engineer to the bridge or the engine control room without
an alarm condition. Alarm indication without sounding the buzzer
is configurable when the Watch Calling System is in off-duty
mode.

18

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

1.4.6

ShipViewer

ShipViewer is a software package that runs on a standard personal


computer connected to the DataChief C20 local area network.
The computer can be installed anywhere on the ship. It has similar
viewing capabilities as those found in the Remote Operator
Station, but no control functions. The following systems can be
monitored through ShipViewer dependent on the system
configuration:
Engine monitoring and control system
Power management system
Fire system
Tank system
The system presents online data, mimic diagrams, logged data and
allows convenient printing facilities. It is a useful tool to avoid
misunderstanding and lack of information.
Functions

Presentation of logged ship data and mimic diagrams.


Presentation of alarms.
Presentation of alarm history.
Status on open/closed valves, running/stopped equipment etc.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

19

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

1.4.7

Distributed Processing Units

General

A number of different Distributed Processing Units are available


for different tasks. The main functions of the Distributed
Processing Units are to monitor analogue or digital sensors and to
provide analogue and digital output to different devices. All units
have the same mechanical construction and are built using the
same electronic design principles. The main characteristics of the
Distributed Processing Units are:

Figure 12 Distributed Processing Units (DPU)


LED indicators on the housing for Watch-dog, Run, General
information, unit initialised and power polarity.
Three-way isolation between:
- I/O and power.
- I/O and process-bus.
- Power and process-bus.
Single printed circuit board design.
Easy service replacement without setting trimmers, dip
switches, jumpers or sockets.
No additional EMC protection required (only IP).
Time synchronisation.
Non-volatile memory.
Remote alarms function.
Dual CAN-bus interfaces.
Software can be downloaded into the unit.

20

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

Built In Self-Test (BIST) monitoring temperature, power and


sensor excitation overload.
All parameters are stored in each unit.
Each unit is remotely configurable.
No serviceable parts inside.
All connections are plugable.
Each Distributed Process Unit contains its own microprocessor.
These are programmed for a number of different tasks such as
detecting when a monitored signal move outside set limits.
Unwanted alarms are inhibited during start-up and shut-down of
the machinery. Status information is continuously monitored by
the DataChief C20s Remote Operator Stations through the
system network.
When an unacceptable condition is detected, the Distributed
Process Unit and DataChief C20 generates an alarm signal,
identifies the responsible sensor, and provides information about
the condition. The following gives a short description of each
Distributed Processing Unit type:
Remote Analogue Input (RAi-16)

This unit has 16 analogue input channels. Each channel is


selectable as voltage, current and resistance input in different
ranges and has free technical units scaling. It also incorporates a
5-500Hz counter channel. The main features are:
16 analog or digital input channels.
Scaled in technical units.
1 Counter 5 - 500 Hz.
Limit check.
Alarm and monitoring for all channels.
Trend.
Time stamp of alarms and events (0.001 seconds).
Self checking.
Sensor excitation power overload.
CAN net status, error handling.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

21

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Remote Analogue Input (RAi-10tc)

This unit has 10 analogue input channels. It is used for temperature


measurements with Thermo Coupler (TC) elements of different
type. It is particularly suited to monitor engine exhaust
temperatures. A large variety of temperature elements can be
connected, with ranges 50, 200, 0 to + 600_C. A Cold Junction
Compensation function is included. If external compensation is
needed, the use of external Thermo Coupler amplifiers and RAi-16
is recommended. The main features are:
10 thermo-coupler input channels.
Scaled in technical units.
Limit check.
Alarm and monitoring for all channels.
Trend.
Time stamp of alarms and events.
Self checking.
Sensor excitation power overload.
CAN net status, error handling.
Remote Digital Input (RDi-32 and RDi-32a)

These units have 32 digital input channels/dry contacts and


includes LED status indicators. The main features are:
32 digital input channels with LED status indicators.
Input dry contacts.
Alarm and monitoring for all channels.
Trend.
Time stamp of alarms and events.
Self checking.
Sensor excitation power overload.
CAN net status, error handling.
Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8)

This unit has 8 analogue output channels. Each channel is


selectable for voltage or current output in different ranges and
almost free technical units scaling. This module is suited to drive
analogue indicators. By placing the module close to instruments
long cables can be avoided. The main features are:
8 analog output channels.

22

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

10VDC / 20 mA.
CAN net status, error handling.
Remote Digital Output (RDo-16)

This unit has 16 digital output channels and includes LED status
indicators. The maximum output current for each channel is 3
Amperes (resistive load). Maximum voltage is 230 VAC. The main
features are: 16 digital output channels with LED status indicator.
The main features are:
Change over, brake before make relay-contacts.
Pulse on output.
Pulse off output.
CAN net status, error handling.
Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1)

The RIO-C1 is a highly flexible input/output Distributed


Processing Unit. It is particularly suited for electric generator
control, main engine or auxiliary engine safety systems.
The unit is equipped with four input channels, which can be
individually configured to handle both analogue and digital
signals. Each channel has an electronic fuse to protect the
electronics against damage.
The unit can connect to single-phase AC voltage and a current
signal. Based on these signals the following values can be
measured and calculated:
AC voltage available from generator and busbar.
AC current supplied from the generator.
AC frequency of generator and busbar.
Phase angle between AC voltages, for synchronising circuit
breakers.
Phase angle between AC voltage and current, for calculating
reactive load, kVAr.
Active load calculation based on AC voltage, current and phase
angle.
The unit can be connected to dual pick-ups, measuring rotating
speed of any machinery, in the speed range of 0 1500 Hz. The two
analogue output channels can drive any indicator by either voltage
or current.
The unit can further control six digital output channels (2-pole
relay (normal open/normal closed) or solenoid valve driver with
built-in loop fail detection facilities.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

23

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Number of
channels

Function

Level

Digital output

Solenoid valve driver or relay,


max 3 A resistive load

Analogue output

mA

Analogue input.
ACV (1--phase)

Max. 30Vrms, 50/60 Hz

Analogue input.
AC current

Max. 1A, 50/60 Hz

Analogue/digital
input, flexible

As RAi--16

Input from pickup

24VDC (counter input)

Digital input

As RDI-32

Table 1 RIO-C1 Process connections.


The main features are:
21 analog or digital, input and output channels with LED status
indicator.
Alarm and monitoring for all channels.
Trend.
Time stamp of alarms and events.
Self checking.
Sensor excitation power overload.
CAN net status, error handling.
Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2)

The RIO-C2 is a combination module for digital inputs and


outputs. The unit is equipped with eight digital input channels
which are galvanically isolated between the sensor signals. The
digital input sensor can be either a potential free contact (switch)
or an external 24VDC or 24VAC signal. Each channel has an
electronic fuse to protect the electronics against damage. When the
faulty sensor interface has returned to normal, the electronic fuse
is automatically reset. The unit can control eight digital output
channels, 2-pole relays (normal open/normal closed). It is
particularly suited for control of pumps and valves. The main
features are:
8 input and 8 output channels with LED status indicator.
- 8 channels relays change over, brake before make.
- 8 channels digital inputs, with possibility for 24VDC live
input or dry contacts.

24

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

Alarm and monitoring for all channels.


Trend.
Time stamp of alarms and events.
Self checking.
Sensor excitation power overload.
CAN net status, error handling.
Process Segment Starcoupler

The CAN line is vulnerable against short circuit and unterminated


lines. A short-circuit or a broken line will disable the entire CAN
segment. The Process Segment Starcoupler protects two sections
of a CAN segment from each other.
Each terminal on the Process Segment Starcoupler is based on the
ISO 11898 standard, with optical isolation. The Process Segment
Starcoupler also protects the terminals against dominant bits that
are not part of a CAN message. Thus short-circuit or malfunction
on one CAN terminal does not affect the other CAN terminals.
The maximum length of one CAN segment at 125kBaud is 530m.
A segment going through a Process Star Coupler is limited to
515m. This length is the maximum line length between any two
nodes in the CAN segment. For that reason it is advised to use the
Process Segment Starcoupler to split two sections of a process
segment, where the segment is running through rough
environment or fire zones.
Voltage converter controller (VCC)

The VCC-440 module is designed for use in main switchboards.


The module secures the installation of the power management and
generator protection system, by transforming the higher voltages
to low and safe levels. The VCC-440 module is equipped with six
voltage transformers to transform from 440 to 24 VAC. The
module handles three major tasks:
Supply the C3 generator protection module with AC voltage
from the measured three phase generator bus bars, L1-L2,
L1-L3 and L2-L3, derated from 440 to 24 VAC.
Supply the C3 generator protection module with 24VDC power
(1A), using the generator busbar (L2-L3) as source.
Supply the C4 power management module with a single phase
AC voltage from the generator busbar L1-L2 and the
switchboard busbar L1-L2, derated from 440 to 24 VAC.
As an option, the VCC module can be equipped with transformers
for 690 VAC.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

25

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Generator monitoring and control (C4)

The C4 module is designed for control of marine generators and


bustie breakers. The in- and outputs are designed for interfacing to
voltage and current transformers, as well as switchboard
equipment.
Synchronize and connect of generator CB.
Synchronize and connect of bustie CB.
Start and stop of auxiliary diesel engine.
RPM set point control of auxiliary diesel engine.
Optional control of primer pump for AE.
Optional control of fuel selection for AE.
Calculation of generator load (kW, kVAr).
Driving MSB instruments (kW, kVAr).
Load sharing between generators.
AVR set point control (optional).
Generator protection (C3)

The C3 module is designed for protection of marine generators.


The in- and outputs are designed for interfacing to voltage and
current transformers as well as switchboard equipment. The
module has a 7-segment display trip indicator, to be independent
of external indicators. The C3 module is available in two versions:
C3-GP:

Generator Protection

C3-GDCP: Generator & differential current protection


The module has a dual 24VDC power connection, to uniterruptible
power supply and generator voltage.
Short circuit tripping of generator CB.
Over current tripping of generator CB.
Reverse power tripping of generator CB.
Optional differential current protection.
Local indication of reason for trip.
Local reset of tripping.
Calculation of generator load (kW, kVAr).
Calculation of phase angel between voltage and current (cosine
).

1.4.8

Gateways

General

Two types of gateways are available.

26

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

The System Gateway: Used as a redundant gateway between


CAN-bus and Local Area Network.
The dual Processing System Controller: Used as a redundant
gateway between two CAN segments (sections of the
CAN-bus).
The main purposes of both units are to provide galvanic isolation
between different parts of the network and to segregate process bus
traffic in large systems. Messages are then converted between the
network parts, while maintaining redundancy.
Both units provide a service to protect all nodes (Distributed
Processing Units, Watch Bridge Unit, Watch Cabin Units and
Local Operator panels) connected to the CAN-bus. If the
communication with one node fails, the gateways will generate a
system failure message identifying the node and the failure. The
Dual Process System Controller may also be equipped with
supervisory control logic for particularly demanding tasks.
The System Gateway SGW

The System Gateway is a four channel CAN-bus to dual Local


Area Network gateway. Its main task is to receive messages from
the two CAN-buses, and update the Remote Operator Stations.
Handling of operator commands and downloading of parameters
and software from the Remote Operator Stations to the nodes
(Distributed Processing Units and Local Operator Stations) are
handled as well.
The System Gateway will route global CAN-bus messages
between the four CAN-buses. Global messages are data messages
needed in more than one bus segment, typically messages for
inhibiting or blocking alarms during start-up or shut-down.
The System Gateway functions as an intelligent message converter
sending and receiving data between any of its CAN channels and
units having Process Data Segment located on the Local Area
Network. The converter function will pre-process CAN messages
and load them into a local database for distribution. The other way
the converter will convert messages from Process Data Segment
and route them to the relevant node (Distributed Processing Units,
or Local Operator panels).
All necessary configuration and software installation is done
through the Local Area Network. The Simple Network
Management Protocol is implemented to gain access via the Local
Area Network to System Gateway and CAN diagnostic databases.
Galvanic isolation is provided between the 24V power input and
the System Gateway interfaces.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

27

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC)

The dual Process Segment Controller is a dual two channel CAN


gateway. It consist of two processors, each with two CAN
interfaces. The two processors have separate power connections,
and they share information via dual port memory.
In this way the two processors are able to run in parallel and
provide redundancy both for CAN-bus communication and for
logic functions. The main function is to process messages from the
local CAN-bus segment and send them on the global CAN bus,
where they are available for other dual Process Segment
Controllers and System Gateways. It handles operator commands
and downloading of parameters and software from any System
Gateway or Remote Operator Station to the Distributed Processing
Units connected to the local CAN-bus.
When the dual Process Segment Controller is controlling a set of
Distributed Processing Units, both processors are working in
parallel running the same process algorithm. In this function the
dual Process Segment Controller operate as a running back-up.
The dual Process Segment Controller is equipped with a dual serial
interface (RS422/485), primarily designated to communicate with
other manufacturers equipment. Galvanic isolation is provided
between the power connections and the CAN-bus, and between the
two CAN-buses. The main features are:
Dual two channel CAN gateway with separate and galvanic
isolated processors.
Possible to power the two processors from separate power
supplies.
High speed data-link between the two processors.
A node with CANopen master capability on all four CAN
channels.
Redundant routing of messages between local and global CAN
segments.
Dual serial interface, galvanic isolated, RS422/485 to
communicate with other vendors equipment.
Various redundant application process control logic. When the
two processors in the dual Process Segment Controller is
controlling the same Distributed Processing Units they are
working in parallel running the same process algorithm.

28

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

1.5

Software components
1.5.1

Humane Machine Interface

Operator control panel

The Operator Control Panel is either available as a dedicated panel


or displayed and operated from the colour graphics display using
a standard PC keyboard and mouse. The Operator Control Panel
include the following main functions:
Alarm display selection and acknowledgement.
Selection and set-up of information to be monitored.
Set-up and activation of logging (printing).
Parameter adjustment.
Extended Alarm and watch-calling functions.
When only monitoring facilities are required the panels control
functions can be inhibited.

Figure 13 Remote Operator Stations.


Alarm and monitoring display

A number of display windows are available for presenting alarms


and monitored values. Alarm windows include:
Alarm group display (activated by the group alarm
push-buttons).
Alarm summary, containing a list of all active alarms messages.
Alarm history, containing a continuous list of time-stamped
alarm messages.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

29

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Monitoring windows include:


Group display containing a list of all measuring points within
an alarm group.
Information display for a selected point.
Tag details giving detailed information about each measuring
point in the system.
Process mimics, bargraphs & status displays

The system can include (as an option) a number of standard display


pictures for common information from the engine and surrounding
equipment. The standard mimic windows are:
Exhaust gas temperatures and average temperature bar graph.
Bar graphs.
Trend curves.
In addition, customised mimic diagrams will be designed for each
project according to the piping diagrams. These display windows
show the status of the equipment (open/closed, running/stopped,
% filling etc.) and are interactive, allowing operation of the
equipment.
Logging/hard copy

All logs can be printed on request. The autolog and the selected
points log can also be configured to print at specified intervals. The
following logging function are available:
Alarm log (time stamped alarm and return to normal).
Selected points log.
Complete log.
Group log.
Inhibited points log.
Autolog.
All alarms are printed in red. A separate deskjet printer can be
fitted to print mimic display windows as an option.
Self-checking and diagnostics

The Distributed Processing Units have an on-line Built In


Self-Test (BIST) system, that monitors the units temperature,
power, and sensor excitation.
Testing of the Remote Operator Stations and their ability to give
alarms according to the requirements, is initiated by pushing the
alarm test push-button on the Operator Control Panel. In
addition, the electronics is automatically tested when power is
turned on.

30

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

Access control

In order to limit or enable control of the process from any Remote


Operator Station an advanced passwords system is available .
Changes of limits or parameters are also guarded through the use
of passwords. All operator actions can be logged with time tags
(optional).

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

31

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

1.5.2

System functions

Alarm block

Some of the alarms are conditional and will be blocked when a


specified condition is present. For instance when the main engine
is stopped the lubrication oil pressure falls and should normally
have triggered an alarm condition. Since this is quite normal the
alarm is blocked. This function is started by defining a signal as an
inhibit signal for a specified alarm or a specified group of alarms.
An adjustable time delay for each signal is available to extend the
blocking situation.
Alarm acknowledge

It is possible to acknowledge alarms while a mimic window, alarm


group or alarm summary is displayed. Alarm acknowledgement
for separate or group alarms displayed on the screen is done
through a single push of the same pushbutton.
Engine exhaust gas temperature monitoring

The DataChief C20 exhaust gas monitoring system calculates the


deviation between the individual cylinders and the average value
of all cylinders. An alarm is given if the deviation exceeds the
acceptable limit. Alarm limits are continuously calculated based
on the engine load. The deadband is set narrower as the engine load
increases. Individual variations due to different exhaust piping and
sensor locations for each cylinder are taken into account.
Individual calculations for each cylinder bank are when relevant
made. The maximum number of cylinder for each engine or
cylinder bank is 12. As the average temperature is used as reference
for the deviations, it is necessary to correct the temperature of each
cylinder, to get the same temperature in all cylinders as reference.
This correction is done when running the engine at full load. When
the average temperature is below a preset value, the deviation
alarm is blocked.
Trend monitor

The DataChief C20 automatically records selected


measurements, and store them for use in the trend monitoring
system. This system can present recorded data for all variables as
curves. The trend monitor is part of the Remote Operator Station.
Two functions are available; Select Trend and Display Trend.
The Select Trend function assigns the display of trend curves to
specified variables. The operator can specify five different trend
displays with eight variables each, giving a total of forty recorded
variables display.

32

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

The Display Trend function displays the selected trend as


continuous curves. The present value is at the right hand side of the
display window while the previous values are displayed towards
the left. Each curve has an assigned colour.
The trend display gives tag name, tag description and the
numerical actual value of eight variables at a time.
Fuel performance system (optional)

The fuel economising system is a tool to monitor fuel consumption


and assess the efficiency of the propulsion machinery. To study
performance parameters momentary values are available.
Accumulated fuel consumption and propeller shaft power such as
for a voyage can be displayed and printed for reporting.
Calculations are based on the Distributed Processing Units making
continuous measurements. The following sensor data are required:
Fuel oil flow for each propulsion engine.
Both input and output flow must be measured.
Fuel oil temperature for all input and output flows.
Running signal for each propulsion engine.
Shaft power (torque) for each propeller shaft.
Ship speed.
Based on these measurements the following performance
parameters are calculated:
Momentary fuel consumption for each engine in kg/hrs.
Total momentary fuel consumption in kg/hrs.
Hull efficiency in kg/nm.
Engine efficiency for each engine in g/kWh.
Shaft power for each shaft in MW.
Total shaft power in MW.
Fuel consumption and power output is calculated over the voyage
period. Accumulated data includes:
Duration of voyage in hours.
Distance travelled in nautical miles.
Accumulated fuel consumption for each main engine in tons.
Total accumulated fuel consumption in tons.
Accumulated propeller shaft power in for each shaft in MWh.
Total accumulated propeller shaft power in MWh

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

33

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Accumulated values can be reset by the operator. When doing so,


the accumulated values are printed (a post voyage report). All fuel
economising measurements and calculations are available as a
display window on any of the Remote Operator Stations.
Running hours & counters

To improve the maintenance plan and to decide which components


needs overhauling, it is important to know the running hours for
each component. The DataChief C20 running hours function
keeps track of the running hours for selected pumps, fans,
compressors, purifiers & generators etc., and present the result to
the operator on demand.
Any status signal interfaced to the DataChief C20 can be used to
count running hours. Two separate counter functions are available:
Counter for total active running hour.
Lap counter.
A table containing all parameters and their running hour values can
be printed on demand. Values can be manually reset when units
have been overhauled. When required, adjustments can be made
to the total running hour or lap counter for any unit.

34

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

1.5.3

Process control functions

All data acquisition, signal conditioning, signal scaling and


process control is performed by each individual Distributed
Processing Unit. This solution guarantees that local operation is
available even if the Remote Operator Stations are not functioning.
Stand by pumps
General

Pump control is located in the Distributed Processing Units.


Remote control is available from the Remote Operator Stations in
two ways:
Through the stand by pump mimic diagrams.
Through a mimic diagram included in the monitoring and
control system.
Stand by start at low pressure

When the pressure drops below the set limit the stand by pump
automatically starts. The limit may be adjusted if an analogue
sensor is used.
Inhibit stand by start

Starting of the stand by pump is blocked after a blackout or at a


group start, until the pressure has built up. The stand by logic can
also be inhibited by an external condition, such as main engine
stopped, aux engine stopped or a similar condition.
Restart after blackout

Some units have to be automatically restarted after a blackout.


These units are included in a start sequence. The delay time defined
in the Distributed Processing Units pump logic determines the start
sequence. The operator can adjust the sequence timing.
Group start of pumps

Remote controlled pumps can be started in sequence.


Alarms from the stand by pump logic

Stand by start alarm.


Auto start fail or trip.
Non stand by alarm (indicates that a stopped pump is no longer
in stand by mode).
Sensors: Pressure switches or analogue sensors may be used for
the control functions.
Limits: All limits are downloaded from the remote Operator
Station as part of its database. Limits may be adjusted from Remote
Operator Station or at the Local Operator Station.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

35

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Configuration: To maintain redundancy in a two or three pump


system, the signals from the motor starters and the process are
normally routed to different Distributed Processing Units. This
configuration allows the system to work even if one of the
Distributed Processing Unit fails. The stand by pump logic is also
active when the Remote Operator Station is down.
Valve control
General

Valve control is located in the Distributed Processing Units.


Remote control is available from the Remote Operator Stations
through mimic diagrams.
Valve Types

Single Acting Valve: This valve type is controlled by one digital


output signal. The valve-position (closed or open) is given by the
signals by one or two limit switches.
Double-Acting Valve: This valve type is controlled by two digital
output and two input signals. The valve is opened or closed by
pulsing a relay.
Double-Acting Valve with Position Control: This valve type is
controlled by two digital outputs; two digital inputs and an analog
input signal. The valve position is set within a defined dead band
by pulsing a relay.
Additional functions

In addition, the following functions are available as part of the


valve control system.
Pulsed output.
Automatic closing of a set of valves.
Automatic opening or closing of valves.
Close on an analog setpoint, using deadband.
Low-level Auto CLOSE Valve, remote OPEN/CLOSE
function. Close when a low level switch opens.
Automatic OPEN/CLOSE of Valve Remote OPEN/CLOSE
function. Close when a low level switch opens.
Valve Change-Over on Alarm with Reset.
PID controllers

The PID controller system is a set of software modules located in


the appropriate Distributed Processing Units. All combinations of
PID controllers are available. Cascade control is accomplished by
connecting two controllers together. The PID controllers can be
configured from the Local or Remote Operator Station. The
following parameters are available:

36

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

Tuning parameters (gain, integration time and derivation time).


Controller setpoint.
Output mode (true control mode, AUTO, or valve position
control mode, SEMIAUTO).
Controller types (P, PI, PD or PID).
Selection of input and output signal type.
Input and output channel number.
Sampling time.
Compressor control

The compressor control system is a set of software modules located


in the appropriate Distributed Processing Units. The main
purpose is to maintain the air receiver pressure at a constant value.
This function includes remote manual and automatic start and stop
of compressors, restart after blackout and automatic drain control.
The compressor control system communicates with the Local or
Remote Operator Station and can be monitored or controlled from
here.
Purifier control

The purifier control system is a set of software modules located in


the appropriate Distributed Processing Units. The purifier control
program is specially written to operate Alfa Lavals self cleaning
oil purifiers, and includes operation of the following equipment:
Crude oil booster pump (optional).
Crude oil temperature controller.
Purifiers.
Sealing valves.
Discharge valves.
The equipment may be controlled from the Remote or Local
Operator Station. Purifier configuration is selected manually by
operating different by-pass valves directly. The purifier control
program will sense if purifiers are running in series or parallel.
Mode of operation is indicated in the mimic display by showing the
oil path as green lines. Purifier no.1 will always run as purifier,
whereas purifier no.2 may be selected to run as purifier or clarifier.
Boiler control

The boiler control system is a set of software modules located the


appropriate Distributed Processing Units. These The program
consists of a standard PID controller and is adaptable to different
types of boilers. The boiler control system uses fail checking
extensively, and employs a program for controlled shut down, and
provides visible alarms.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

37

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Boiler system parameters are available on the Local or Remote


Operator Station. All parameters are found in the steam system
mimic display. System information such as alarms and analogue
values are part of the normal DataChief C20 alarm and
monitoring system. The boiler control involves total control of the
following equipment:
Fuel oil standby pumps.
Burner motor.
Fuel pre heater.
Nozzles.
Ignition unit.
Air damper.
Steam release valve.
These units are connected to and controlled by the appropriate
Distributed Processing Unit.

38

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

1.5.4

Power management system

Introduction

The power management system controls the power generation and


distribution on board the vessel. It includes all the automatic
functions necessary for safe and economic operation of the power
plant.
The basic system consists of one Distributed Processing Unit per
connected genearator unit. Each perform the power management
functions of the connected generator unit. The system is suitable
for electrical generators driven by a diesel engine, a steam turbine
or by the propeller shaft. The Distributed Processing Units have
different configurations and control strategies depending on the
type of drive. The Distributed Processing Units are connected to
Remote Operator Station (Remote Operator Station) which allows
the operator to initiate the same monitoring and control functions
that can be performed locally.
For complex Power management Systems an additional
Distributed Processing Unit, the dPSC, is used for mode control
etc. This is a unit giving redundancy both in function and
communication, and allows separation of local PMS CAN
processbus data traffic from other the global CAN-network of the
DataChief C20 system.
The power management system will be adapted to the specific
configuration of power generators and bus bars on the ship. In
order to comply with the latest rules of separation of functions for
alarm, control and safety, these functions have been addressed to
separate Distributed Processing Units like this:
Complex logic: A Dual Process Segment Gateway (when
needed).
PMS control logic: A Distributed Processing Unit RiO C1 for
each generator.
Diesel generator Safety system: A separate Distributed
Processing Unit RiO C1.
Bus-tie Control: A Distributed Processing Unit RiO C1 for
each Bustie.
Alarms: To Rai-16 or Rdi-32 Units.
Note: These units interact on a dual redundant CAN-bus.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

39

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Generator Control Functions


Synchronizing

The power management system automatically selects and


synchronizes generators to the net as required. A Distributed
Processing Unit controls speed, deviation of voltage/frequency
and breaker.
Frequency Control/Loadsharing

When automatic mode is selected, one of the Distributed


Processing Units must be defined as Master. The Distributed
Processing Unit designated as No.1 Stand-By will
automatically be master if no other master selection is made. The
bus bar frequency and voltage values from the main switchboard
are available in all the Distributed Processing Units. The Master
mode Distributed Processing Unit is the reference for frequency
and voltage values. It maintains a constant bus frequency by
controlling its engines speed. The Master mode Distributed
Processing Unit controls the bus frequency while the stand-by
Distributed Processing Units controls the load-sharing.
Asymmetric Loadsharing

The Distributed Processing Unit has an asymmetric or unbalanced


load-sharing function that will force one generator to run at almost
maximum load for a pre-defined period, while the second
generator is operating at minimal load and fuel consumption. At
the expiration of the defined period, the generators swap loads.
Symmetric Loadsharing

If two or more generators are running and asymmetric


load--sharing has not been requested, the load is shared equally
between the generators.
Load-dependent Start/Stop of the Stand-by Generators

Each stand-by Distributed Processing Unit will automatically


start, synchronise and connect its generator according to its
assigned order-of-priority and whenever it receives one of the
following requests:
Switch-on request from the heavy consumer(s) if the generators
in operation cannot provide enough power.
A start request from another Distributed Processing Unit when
its operating generator has developed a fault, which prevents it
from maintaining its share of the load.
A start request from another Distributed Processing Unit when
its operating generator is approaching the point of overload.

40

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

It is possible to override or block the low load auto-stop feature.


Whenever blocked, the stand-by generator will keep on running,
independent of the load parameters. This feature is especially
useful when a heavy consumer (e.g. a ships bow thruster) is
required to be started instantaneously at irregular intervals.
Automatic Start-and-Connect After a Power Blackout.The power
blackout logic is triggered when the power management system
detects that all breakers are disconnected and that the line voltage
is low. (<10% of normal). In a power blackout situation, all of the
generators controlled by each stand-by Distributed Processing
Unit will start and connect to the bus.
Supervision of Heavy Consumer Switch-on
Each Distributed Processing Unit is able to supervise the switch-on
control heavy consumers to ensure that a switch-on will not cause
a power blackout. If the demand for power exceeds the capacity of
the operating generators, the power management system will start
up and connect a stand-by generator to ensure that sufficient
capacity is available before the request for switch-on is granted.
Power Management Functions with Shaft
Generator

Main Functions
One Distributed Processing Unit control the Shaft Generator
Distributed Processing Unit, whereas other Distributed Processing
Units control the bus tie breaker and the other auxiliary generators.
The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit logic is adaptable
to various switch board configuration.
The following functions are available:
Control of the shaft generator circuit breaker and the bus tie
breaker with automatic synchronisation.
Control of the connection and disconnection of bow- and stern
thruster.
Overall control of the Distributed Processing Units that control
the auxiliary generator sets.
Operational Modes/Mode Control
The power management system allows many different modes of
operation. The following standard modes are provided, an
example with 1 SG, two DGs, two busties and a bowthruster:
Harbour: Both DGs running. Both busties closed. This mode
allows the bow thruster to be started. If load is low, and
bowthruster not running the standby DG will automatically be
disconnected and stopped. This is blocked if the thruster is
running or the STOP BLOCK switch in the Diesel Generator
Distributed Processing Unit is activated.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

41

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

At sea: The SG is running. Both busties closed. The bow


thruster is blocked for starting. Both DGs are stopped and
standby ready for start.
Cargo handling: Bustie 2 is open. One or two DGs power
consumers on port busbar. The shaft generator is powering
heavy consumers on stand-by busbar. The bow thruster is
blocked for starting.
Manoeuvre: Bustie 1 is open. One or two DGs power
consumers on port busbar. The shaft generator power the bow
thruster only.
Transition between these modes is possible in two ways:
Mode control: Selection of one of the predefined operational
mode, leading to a set of actions which the operator has to
perform in order to put the Power Generating System into that
mode.
One-Touch Mode Control: Selection of one of the predefined
operational mode, leading to a sequence of automatic events to
put the Power Generating system into that mode. This
one-touch control to be made from the Remote Operator
Station.
Always when changing mode from shaft generator powering the
net to auxiliary generators powering the net or to split net
operation, the Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit will
give a start and connect command to at least two auxiliary
generators. Upon reception of this command, the power
management system will only start one diesel at a time.
Shaft Generator Overload

The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit will check for


overload of the shaft generator. If overloaded for more than a
predefined period of time, a request for split net is generated.
Shaft- And Auxiliary Generator In Parallel

There is an adjustable time limit for parallel load sharing between


shaft- and auxiliary generators. The bus-tie will automatically be
disconnected when parallel load sharing exceeds this time limit.
Shaft Generator Control Functions

The shaft generator is interfaced to the integrated control and


alarm/monitoring system via the Shaft Generator Distributed
Processing Unit. The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit
has facilities for remote start and stop. A speed drop function
versus load enable the shaft generator to be run in parallel with
diesel generators.
When the controller is set to remote operation mode, the following
functions are available:

42

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

Manual start from keyboard and mimic diagrams


Manual stop from keyboard and mimic diagrams
Automatic stop in case of alarms on main engine or the shaft
generator itself
Monitoring of critical parameters when the shaft generator is
running. (Additional function to controller, with its own safety
functions for the shaft generator)
When the shaft generator is connected, the master Distributed
Processing Unit will do loadsharing on the diesel generator in
parallel with the shaft generator. The frequency on the busbar is a
result of the ME speed. Parallel load sharing between shaft
generator and diesel generators are limited in time, controlled from
the Power Management System.
The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit and the
Distributed Processing Units perform the functions for the Power
Management System completely independent of the Alarm- and
Monitoring System.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

43

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

1.6

Technical specifications
1.6.1

Introduction

The following is a summary of the technical specifications for the


DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with process
control and power management. Kongsberg Maritime Ship
Systems is engaged in continues development of its products and
reserves the right to alter specifications without prior notice.

1.6.2

Operator Control Panel (OCP)

Supply voltage: 24 V DC, 5% ripple (Input filter included)


Power consumption: 4 W Nom (12 W when lamp test
activated).
Ambient operational conditions: 0_C to + 70_C inside
console.
Maximum relative humidity: 97% non-condensing
Ambient storage temperature: - 30_C to + 80_C
Production burn-in: + 70_C for 72 hours
Type approved by classification societies: DNV, LRS, BV,
GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR, PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China).
Cable connections:
- Power terminal: 2.5 mm2
- Signal terminal: 2.5 mm2
Cable length to PC: 2,5 m.
Weight of unit: 4 kg (cables and terminals 0.5 kg)
Dimensions: W482.6 H265.8 D45 mm.
Panel cut-out: W450 +1 H257 + 1 mm.
Mounting: Flush mounting with screws or free standing in
cabinet.
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC): The Operator
Control Panel complies with the classification society
requirements regarding electrostatic discharge, radiated
susceptibility and conducted susceptibility. In addition it is
prepared to meet the EU directive valid from 1.1.96 regarding
radiated emission and conducted emission.

1.6.3

Midi Operator Station (MOS)

Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC 5 % ripple.

44

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

Power consumption: 10 W.
Ambient operational temperature: -15_C to + 70_C
Max. rel. Humidity: 96% non-condensing.
Ambient storage temperature: 25C to +70C in a dry area
with approx. 70% humidity.
Display: TFT colour, 5.7, 320 x 240 pixels.
Housing: Cast aluminium back, polycarbonate front.
Weight of unit: 1.5 kg.
Dimensions: W252 H144 B70 mm.
Panel cut-out: 242 x 134 mm.
Mounting: Bracket for table, ceiling and wall. Flush mount
with removable corners.
Shock and vibration: DnV Class B, IACS E10 (Direct mount
on engines, compressors, etc.).
EMC properties: According to IACS E10, IEC 60945.

1.6.4

Local Operator Station (LOS)

Supply voltage: 18 32 V DC
Power consumption: 6 W
Ambient operational temperature: 0_C to + 70_C
Maximum relative humidity: 97% non-condensing
Ambient storage temperature: - 30_C to + 80_C
Weight of unit: 1.4 kg.
Dimension:
- Outline: W240 x H144 x D50 mm.
- Cut out: W211 x H138 mm.
Mounting: Screws (4 Pcs M4)

1.6.5

Watch Bridge Unit (WBU)

Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
Power consumption: 6 W
Ambient operational temperature: 0_C to + 70_C
Maximum relative humidity: 97% non-condensing
Ambient storage temperature: - 30_C to + 80_C
Weight of unit: 1.4 kg.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

45

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Dimension:
- Outline: W240 x H144 x D50 mm.
- Cut out: W211 x H138 mm.
Mounting: Screws (4 Pcs M4)

1.6.6

Watch Cabin Unit (WCU)

Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
Power consumption: 6 W
Ambient operational temperature: 0_C to + 70_C
Maximum relative humidity: 97% non-condensing
Ambient storage temperature: - 30_C to + 80_C
Weight of unit: 1.4 kg.
Dimension:
- Outline: W240 x H144 x D50 mm.
- Cut out: W211 x H138 mm.
Mounting: Screws (4 Pcs M4)

1.6.7

Remote Analogue Input (RAi-16)

Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
Power consumption:
- Module Nominal 7,5W, Max. 10W
- Current mode sensors add Nominal 9W, Max. 11
Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
Mechanical environment:
- DnV Class B
- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)
EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
Weight of unit: 2.0 kg.
Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,
PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
Specification: ISO per module in power port: 50 VDC
continues 50 VAC 1 minute.
Isolation:
- Power Complete isolated: (DC/DC Converter)
- I/O: No isolation between channels. Chassis used as 0 Volt
reference.
- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler).

46

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

Signal types:
- Input differential: CMV 10 [ V ]
- Voltage Scaling: 0,1/1/5/10 [Volt]
- Current Scaling: 1/5/10/20 [mA]
- Technical units: Free range
Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD):
- Scaling: PT100, PT1000 []
- Range: PT1000 0-200C, 0-600
0-800C

PT100 0-200C,

Accuracy: Voltage measurement A/D 0.002 %


Accuracy w/signal conditioning: 0.4 %
Sensor excitation voltage and current: 30-40 mA nominal.
Fused at 100mA per channel or 350 ma for the whole module,
with overload indicator.
BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor
excitation overload.

1.6.8

Remote Analogue Input (RAi-10tc)

Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
Power consumption: Nominal 7,5W, Max. 10W
Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
Mechanical environment:
- DnV Class B
- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)
EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
Weight of unit: 1.6 kg.
Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,
PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
Specification: Input: Differential CMV 10[V]. ISO per module
in power port: 50 VDC continues 50 VAC 1 minute.
Isolation:
- Power Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter)
- I/O No isolation between channels. Chassis used as 0
Volt reference.
- CAN Complete isolated (Opto coupler).

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

47

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Signal types:
- Thermocouples with Cold Junction compensation
- According to IEC 584
- Element: R/S/J/E/N 0-200, 0-600C
- Element: B 0-600C
- Element: T 0-200C
- Element: K 0-200, 0-600, 0-1200C
- Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD)
- Scaling PT100, PT1000 []
- Range PT1000 0-200C, 0-600
PT100 0-200C,
0-800C
Accuracy: Voltage measurement A/D 0.002 %
Accuracy w/signal conditioning: 0.5 %

1.6.9

Remote Digital Input (RDi-32 &


RDi-32a)

Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
Power consumption: Nominal 8W
Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
Maximum relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
Mechanical environment:
- DnV Class B
- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)
EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
Weight of unit: 1.8 kg.
Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,
PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
Specification: ISO per module in power port: 50 VDC
continues 50 VAC 1 minute.
Isolation:
RDi-32:
- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler).
- Input: Supplied from 24V DC Main power
- Power: Isolated from Module chassis
- RDi-32a:
- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler).
- Input: Isolated between channels (Opto coupler)
- Power: Isolated from Module chassis

48

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

Signal types: On/off


Specification:
- RDi-32: Dry contact
- RDi-32a: Active signal 24VDC or AC (50-70 Hz)
Sensor excitation voltage and current: only for RDi-32 6 mA
@ 24VDC nominal.
BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor
excitation overload.

1.6.10 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8)


Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
Power consumption: Nominal 8.5W, Max. 10W
Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
Maximum relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
Mechanical environment:
- DnV Class B
- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)
EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
Weight of unit: 1.5 kg.
Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,
PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
Specification: ISO per module in power port: 50 VDC
continues 50 VAC 1 minute.
Isolation:
- Power: Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter)
- I/O: No isolation between channels. Chassis used as 0 Volt
reference.
- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler).
Signal types:
- Voltage Scaling: 0,1/1/5/10[Volt]
- Current Scaling: 1/5/10/20 [mA]
- Technical units: Free range
Accuracy: Voltage conversion D/A 0.1 %
Accuracy w/signal conditioning: 0.4 %
Resolution: 12 bit

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

49

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Bandwidth: 10 [Hz]
BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor
excitation overload.

1.6.11 Remote Digital Output (RDo-16)


Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
Power consumption: Nominal 8.0W, Max. 10W
Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
Mechanical environment:
- DnV Class B
- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)
EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
Weight of unit: 1.6 kg.
Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,
PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
Signal types: Digital Output
Specification: All outputs max. 3 Amps 230V AC Relay:
Resistive load 1 pole change over contact.
Isolation:
- Power: Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter)
- Output: Isolation between channels (relays)
- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler).
BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor
excitation overload.

1.6.12 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1)


Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
Power consumption: Nominal 10.5W, Max. 12W
Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
Mechanical environment:
- DnV Class B
- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)

50

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945


Weight of unit: 2 kg.
Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,
PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
Isolation: Ref.: Engineering Guide 656
BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor
excitation overload.
Digital output: - All outputs max. 3 Amps 250VAC (relay).
Relay for resistive load 1 pole change over (NO/NC). Solid state
for inductive load (solenoid driver in parallel) 24V DC.
Analogue output:
- Range: 22mA
- Accuracy w/signal conditioning: 0.5 [%]
Analogue input ACV (1-phase):
- Input: Max. 30Vrms
- Voltage Scaling: 30 [Volt]
- Frequency scaling: 0-90 [Hz]
- Technical units: Free range
- Accuracy w/ signal conditioning: 1 [%]
Analogue input IAC:
- Input: Max 1A
- Current scaling: 0-1A
- Technical units: Free range
- Accuracy w/signal conditioning: 1 [%]
Input from pickup:
- 24V DC (counter input): - 5 KHz
Analogue/digital input, flexible: - For details, see separate
data sheet for RAi-16.
Digital Input: - For details, see separate data sheet for
RDi-32.
Derived calculated variables:
-

KW active power
KVAr reactive power
COS
Frequency

1.6.13 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2)


Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

51

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Power consumption: Nominal 8W


Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
Mechanical environment:
- DnV Class B
- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)
EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
Weight of unit: 1.8 kg.
Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,
PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
2 ways isolation:
- I/O
Communication.
- Power Communication.
Digital output:
- All outputs max. 3 Amps 230VAC
- Relay: Resistive load 1 pole change over.
Digital input:
- Dry contact, high side or low side switch
- Sensor excitation voltage and current: 6 mA @ 24VDC
nominal.
BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor
excitation overload.
Isolation:
-

CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler)


Input: Isolation between channels (Opto coupler)
Output: Isolation between channels (relays)
Power: Isolated from module chassis

1.6.14 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C3)


Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
Power consumption: Nominal 15W
Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
Mechanical environment:
- Maximum 4g (allows direct mounting on engines,
compressors, etc.)

52

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945


Weight of unit: 2.0 kg.
Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,
PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
3 ways isolation:
- I/O

Communication.

- Power Communication.
- Power I/O
Serial interfaces: 2 CAN ports for redundant communication
interface (galvanic isolated).
4 Digital output:
- All outputs max. 3 Amps 250VAC (relay).
- 1 pole change over. Inductive load.
3 phase ACV input:
- Input: Max. 35Vrms
- Voltage scaling: 29 Volt
- Frequency scaling: 0-90 Hz
- Technical units: Free range
- Accuracy: 1 %
3 phase IAC. Generator current (MSB):
- Input: Max 15A
- Current scaling: 0-5A
- Over current scaling: 0-15A
- Maximum readable input: 15A.max 0.5 s
- Technical units: free range
- Accuracy: 1 %
- Over current: 5 %
3 phase IAC. generator current (internal):
- Input: Maximum 15A
- Current scaling: 0-5A
- Maximum readable input: 5A
- Maximum input: 15A.max 0.5 s
- Technical units: Free range
- Accuracy: 1 %
3 Digital Input:
- Require dry contact or opto coupler.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

53

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Trip display and reset switch: Local 7-segment display on


module, reason for trip indication. Reset switch on module.
BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor
excitation overload.

1.6.15 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C4)


Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
Power consumption: Nominal 15W
Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
Mechanical environment:
- Maximum 4g (allows direct mounting on engines,
compressors, etc.)
EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
Weight of unit: 2.0 kg.
Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,
PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
3 ways isolation:
- I/O
Communication.
- Power Communication.
- Power I/O
8 Digital output:
- All outputs max. 3 Amps 250VAC (relay)
- 1 pole change over. Inductive load.
2 ACV input (bus and generator):
- Input: Max. 35Vrms
- Voltage scaling: 29 Volt
- Frequency scaling: 0-90 Hz
- Technical units: Free range
- Accuracy: 1 [%]
1 phase IAC. generator current input:
-

54

Input: Max 15A


Current scaling: 0-5A
Maximum readable input: 5A.
Maximum input: 15A.max 0.5 s
Technical units: Free range
Accuracy: 1 %

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

4 Digital inputs:
- Require dry contact or opto coupler.
2 Analogue output:
- Range: 22mA and 11V
- Accuracy with signal conditioning: 1.0 %
BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor
excitation overload.

1.6.16 Voltage Converter Controller


(VCC)
Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
Power consumption: 12 W
Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
Mechanical environment:
- Maximum 0.7g
EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
Weight of unit: 3.8 kg.
Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,
PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
Isolation:
- Isolation between input terminal and ground: 2000VAC
- Isolation between input terminals: 2000VAC
2 ACV output synchronisation:
- 1 phase generator and 1 phase bus.
- Range: 0-24VAC
- Accuracy: 1.0 %
3 phase ACV output protection:
- 3 phase generator.
- Range: 0-24VAC
- Accuracy: 1.0 %
1 DC output (Protection backup power):
- Voltage: 24VDC
- Maximum current: 1000mA
- Accuracy: 5.0 %

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

55

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor


excitation overload.

1.6.17 Process Segment Starcoupler


(PSS)
Supply voltage: 18-32 VDC
Power Consumption: Nominal 4 W Max. 5 W
Ambient operational temperature: 15_C to +70 _C
Ambient storage temperature: -25_C to +70_C
Maximum relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
Mechanical environment:
- DnV class B
- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)
EMC properties: According IACS E10, EN60945
Weight of module: 1 kg.
Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,
PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
Specification: Isolation power port: 50 VDC continuous 50
VAC 1 minute.
Isolation:
- Power: Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter)
- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler)

1.6.18 Dual Process Segment Controller


(dPSC)
Supply voltage: 18-32 VDC
Power Consumption: Nominal 12 W Max. 15 W
Ambient operational temperature: 15_C to +70 _C
Ambient storage temperature: -25_C to +70_C
Maximum relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
Mechanical environment:
- DnV class B
- IACS E10 ( Direct mount on engines, compressors etc. )
EMC properties: According IACS E10, EN60945
Weight of module: 1.6 kg.
Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,
PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)

56

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Functional description

Specification: Isolation power port: 50 VDC continuous 50


VAC 1 minute.
Isolation:
- Power: Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter)
- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler)
- Serial line: Complete isolated (Opto coupler)

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

57

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

2 GETTING STARTED
2.1

Introduction
This chapter teaches you how to use the control functions and
displays of the different DataChief C20 operator stations. It is
intended for personnel just starting to use the system. The
following subjects are covered:
- Using the Remote Operator Station
- Using the Midi Operator Station
- Using the Local Operator Station
- The Watch Calling System
- Using the Watch Bridge Unit
- Using the Watch Cabin Unit

58

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started

2.2

Using the Remote Operator Station


2.2.1

Understanding the Operator


Control Panel

The Operator Control Panel often called OCP is a specially


designed keyboard that provides easy access to the operator
functions. It is divided into separate function areas. Push buttons
are combined with lamps to indicate alarms, status of the Extended
Alarm System and to indicate main system functions.
Overview

The following illustration shows the layout ofthe OperatorControl


Panel. The different buttons found on the panel can be divided into
groups and are explained in the following.
Red LEDs - alarm group buttons
Green LEDs - watch function buttons
Yellow LEDs - project dependent buttons
Mimic buttons
Numeric
keyboard

Power on LED

Standard function buttons


Trackball
buttons
Keyboard
connector

Trackball.
Standard function buttons
Alarm functions & display buttons

Figure 14 Operator Control Panel (OCP) layout.


Numeric keyboard and trackball buttons

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

DELETE

Used to delete numeric input (from right to


left) during an input sequence.
(Backspace).

SPACE

Used for passive settings for alarm limits etc.

ENTER

Ends a sequence of numeric input or activates editing.

PREVIOUS
PAGE

Displays the previous page in the selected


page group.
(Page Up)

59

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

NEXT
PAGE

Displays the next page in the selected page


group.
(Page Down)

ARROW
BUTTON

Used to move the cursor or the high--lighted


field. There are four arrow keys; left, right, up
and down.

READ

Used for addressing an object (i.e. pump,


valve) after placing the cursor over it by moving the trackball.

DE-Used for giving a STOP, CLOSE or DEACTIACTIVATE VATE command to an object after addressing
/ STOP
it using the READ button.
ACTIVATE Used for giving a START, OPEN or ACTIVATE
/ START
command to an object after addressing it
using the READ button.

Alarm group buttons


LO, FO, FW, EX,
CW, CA, DO, BW,
MI, DS, BO, BR,
OM, DG, SG, ES,
FI, TS, ST, LS.

INHIBIT POINTS

SYSTEM FAILURE

When a new alarm occurs, the corresponding


alarm group lamp starts flashing, and the
alarm buzzer is activated. To display information about the alarm, push the button. New
alarms are displayed in red colour, acknowledged alarms in yellow. The indicator stops
flashing when all alarms in the group have
been acknowledged, but remains lit until all
alarm conditions have returned to normal.
When this button is pushed, the colour
graphics display shows a list of inhibit
sources.
When a system failure occurs, the corresponding indicator starts flashing, and the alarm
buzzer is activated. To display information
about the system failure, push the button. The
indicator stops flashing when the alarm has
been acknowledged, but remains lit until all
alarm conditions have returned to normal.

Alarm function and display buttons


When an alarm occurs the alarm buzzer and
engine room horn is activated. Push the
SOUND OFF button to stop it.
ALARM SUMMARY Shows all active and unacknowledged alarms
on the colour graphics display. Up to twentysix alarms can be displayed simultaneously. If
there are more alarms, use the NEXT PAGE
and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to see them
all.
SOUND OFF

60

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started

ALARM HISTORY

Displays the last 2000 alarm events, with time


and date. Twentysix alarms are displayed on
each page. The last alarms are at the top of
the list. To turn the pages, using the NEXT
PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons.

ALARM
ACKNOWLEDGE

This button is used to acknowledge alarms. If


an Operator Control Panel group button has
been pushed, the alarm acknowledge button
will acknowledge all unacknowledged alarms
on the colour graphics display. If more than 26
new alarms have occurred, the next page will
automatically be displayed. If an Operator
Control Panel alarm group button has not
been pushed, pushing the Alarm Acknowledge button will acknowledge the latest three
alarms displayed in the lower right corner of
the display.

Standard function buttons


COUNTERS
DISPLAY

Displays counters and lap counters information.

DEVIATION
PARAM. CONFIG.

Menu for input and display of parameters for


deviation calculation of exhaust gas temperatures.
Toggles between all measuringpoints and the
points in a group having an alarm status.

GROUP / ALARM
GROUP DISPLAY

Displays all measuringpoints within an Operator Control Panel alarm group.

SELECTED
BARGR. DISPLAY

Displays preselected measuringpoints as bargraphs.

SELECTED
POINTS DISPLAY

Displays preselected measuringpoints.

SELECTED TREND Display preselected measuringpoints as trend


curves.
DISPLAY
SET DATE & TIME

Used to adjust date & time.

SYSTEM INFO
DISPLAY

Displays system parameters and functions.

TAG DETAILS

Menu used to display details for measuring-points and to change their parameters.

Logging buttons

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

AUTO LOG
CONFIG

Menu used to enable and adjust the auto log


printout time.

MISC. LOGS

Menu used to activate printout of logs and set


up the printer.

61

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Tank and cargo functions


SHIPS DISPLAY

Displays total volume for each tank content


type. Trim/list and draught display. Menu for
manual trim/list specification and input and
sea specific gravity input.

LEVEL CORR.
DISPLAY

Display of raw level/ullage, corrections for


trim, list, sensor offset, specific gravity and
corrected level/ullage.
Tank level [m], filling [%], volume [m3], specific gravity [t/m3] and weight [t] display.

GENERAL TANK
DISPLAY
SEA HARBOUR
SELECT
CARGO TANK
DISPLAY

CARGO API
DISPLAY

Toggles between SEA and HARBOUR mode.


This can be used to suppress tank alarms
during the voyage.
Tank content type, ullage [m], actual temperature [C], volume [m3], filling [%], volume
correction factor, volume at 15 C [m3], weight
air and US Barrels at 60 F.
Tank content type, API, density at vac. 15C,
density in air at 15C, density in air TC, temperature (T) [C], density correction factor and
density at actual temperature.

Mimic display button


MIMIC DISPLAY

Displays mimic window for process monitoring


and/or process control.

Control functions buttons


HIGH / LOW

Toggles between high and low speed of


pumps and fans.

RESET

Reset function for controllable objects such as


pumps, fans, compressors and generators.

MASTER

Master function for pumps, fans, compressors


and generators.

1.ST. STAND BY

1.st standby or stand by selection function for


pumps, fans, compressors and generators.

NEXT STAND BY

Stand by selection function for pumps, fans,


compressors and generators.

AUTO / MAN

Auto/manual (semi auto) mode selection for


pumps, fans, compressors, controllers and
generators.

Viewing conditions and testing buttons


MONITOR OCP
DISPLAY
ALARM TEST

LAMP TEST

62

Menu to decreasing or increasing illumination


for the Operator Control Panel (OCP) and colour graphics display on the Bridge.
To test the alarm buzzers, alarm display, net
communication and alarm printer push the
button. To turn the test off push the button
again.
To test all indicator lamps on the Operator
Control Panel push the button.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started

Watch indication and calling functions buttons


BRIDGE WATCH

ENGINE WATCH

CHIEF ENG. ON
DUTY

Initiates Bridge Watch (unattended engine


room). This means that the engine watch responsibility is transferred to the bridge.
Initiates Engine Watch. This means that the
engine watch responsibility is in engine control room mode.
When this indicator lamp is lit the Chief Engineer is on duty, both in bridge-- and engine
watch. The ON DUTY indicator in the Chief
Engineers cabin and in the engineers dayrooms are lit.

CALL ALL
ENGINEERS

When this button is pushed, the indicator


lamp starts flashing, and the indicators and
buzzers in all WatchCall panels in the engineers quarters are activated. To deactivate
this function push the button again.

ENGINEERS
ON DUTY

When one or more of the 1st to 4th engineer


on duty lamps are lit, the engineer on duty is
in charge of the watch. The ON DUTY indicator in the engineers cabin and dayrooms are
lit.

CALL DUTY
ENGINEER

When this button is pushed the indicator lamp


starts flashing and the indicators and buzzer
on the WatchCall panel in the duty engineers
quarter is activated. To deactivate this function push the button again.
Note: This function is only available as an
alternative to a 4th Engineer button.

2.2.2

Systems without Operator Control


Panel

Some systems are delivered without Operator Control Panels.


These systems are operated through standard keyboard and mouse.
In these systems the Operator Control Panel is displayed on the
colour graphics monitor. Operation is similar for both types of
systems.
1

Push the F1 function key to display the Operator Control


Panel.

Use the mouse to push the buttons and select the various
display pages.

The following fuction keys are used:


-

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

F1: Operator Control Panel (OCP) display


F2: Alarm/group display
F3: Sound off
F4: Alarm acknowledge
F5: Tag tetails

63

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Figure 15 Typical Operator Control Panel displayed on


monitor.

2.2.3

Understanding the display

The Remote Operator Station includes a standard colour graphics


display. The operator interacts with the display through the
Operator Control Panel or through keyboard and mouse.
Overview

The following illustration explains the layout of the Remote


Operator Station display.
About button: Push the button to display information about the
software version etc.
Title window: Contains the title of the information currently
displayed in the main window.

64

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started

About button
Title window

Status window
Time window

Main window

Alarm window
Function window

Figure 16 Main areas of the Remote Operator Station display.


Status window: The status window is divided into two
columns. These contains important status information for user
settings. The following abbreviations are used:
- Buz - OCP buzzer disabled.
- ACK - Acknowledge limitation override enabled.
- Mim - Mimic access override enabled.
Time window: Shows current date and time.

Refer to page 107 for information on How to change time zone.

Main window: Contains the main display information such as


alarm lists, bargraphs, trend displays,configuration data,mimic
diagrams etc.
Function window: Displays information related to user input.
Alarm window: Displays the last four alarms independent of
the information displayed in the main window.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

65

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

2.3

Using the Midi Operator Station


2.3.1

Overview

The Midi Operator Station, often called MOS is a specially


designed operator panel that provides easy access to operator
functions. It is used as a local operator station in larger systems or
as the main operator station for more limited systems.
The display examples shown in this manual are not always an exact
copy of what you will see on the screen, as the presentation
depends on your system configuration and choices of set-up.

2.3.2

Understanding the keyboard

Some of the key functions are general and can be applied at any
time, other key functions are related to certain menu(s) and can
only be applied when in the appropriate menu.
Escape
Page down
Page up
Acknowledge
Sound off

Clear
Function keys
F1 to F4

Figure 17 Keyboard layout.

66

ESC

Escape. Removes menus. Goes back to the previous picture in up


to five steps by pushing repeatedly.

MENU

Turns menus on. The displayed menu will vary with the
operational context.

ENTER

Go to submenu or display. Confirms insertion and editing of data.


Gives access to set-up displays.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started

Page up. Moved the displayed information up a page in the selected


group.
Page down. Moved the displayed information down a page in the
selected group.
Sound off. Push to turn audible alarms off.
ACK

Alarm acknowledge.
Four-way navigator key. Moves a square cursor up/down to select
text in data displays. Moves a square cursor left/right/up/down and
to select objects in mimic pictures.

F1 - F4

Function keys. The function is specified by the text next to the key
(left side). Function keys have a one minute time-out to avoid
accidental input. Push the Page up or Page down keys to active the
functions keys again.

0-9

Alpha-numeric keys for insertion of letters and numbers. Push the


button repeatedly until the desired letter or number is displayed.

.-_

Key to insert the following special characters (. - _). Push the


button repeatedly until the desired character is displayed.

CLR

Clear. Deletes data in enter or edit mode.

2.3.3

Understanding the display

The midi operator station includes a bright colour flat panel


display. The operator interacts with the display through the
keyboard.
Window title: Contains the title of the information currently
displayed in the main window.
Menu window: Displays the various menus available.
Scroll bar: Indicates how much of the total information in this
window is displayed (similar to scroll bars used in standard
Windows applications).
Alarm window: Displays the last alarm independent of the
information displayed in the main window.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

67

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Window title

Menu window
Scroll bar

Alarm window

Figure 18 Display layout example.


Window title
Indicates that
additional
function
buttons are
available. Use
the Page up
and Page
Down buttons
to display
them.

Alarm window

Figure 19 Display layout example including graphics.

68

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started

Indicates that
additional
information is
available. Use
the navigator
key to display
it.
Scroll bar

Alarm window

Figure 20 Display layout example.

2.3.4

Menu overview

The following menus are available:


Main Menu
1 Alarm Menu
2 DPU Overview
3 Tag Selection Menu
4 Configuration Menu
5 Help
Alarm Menu
1 Alarm History
2 Alarm Summary
3 Alarm Group Display
Tag Menu
1 Tag Details
2 Mimic
3 Alarm Status
4 Main Menu

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

69

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Tag Selection Menu


1 Control Menu
2 PMS Menu
3 MMI Tags
4 All Tags
Control Menu
1 Pumps
2 Valves
3 Controllers
4 Standby Sets
PMS Menu
1 Power Manager
2 Switch boards
3 Generators
4 Aux Breakers
5 Sync Breakers
Configuration
1 User Access
2 Keyboard/Screen
3 Advanced
4 Printer
5 Self check

70

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started

2.4

Using the Local Operator Station


2.4.1

Understanding the Local Operator


Station

Overview

The Local Operator Station is used for local access to the


Distributed Processing Units for inspection of process variables,
local operation of equipment, adjustment of parameters and
inspection of the built-in diagnostics.
LOS
CAN A

dPSC

DPU
001
dPSC

DPU
002

DPU
003

DPU
004

CAN B

Figure 21 Local Operator Station on CAN bus segment.


The Local Operator Station (LOS) can connect to all Distributed
Processing Units (DPU) connected to the same CAN-bus. From
the local operator station you select a Distributed Processing Unit.
As soon as connection is established, the Local Operator Station
is able to control it.
Alarm indicators
Display
On line
indicator

Display
Display
Display
Display

Line
Line
Line
Line

#
#
#
#

1
2
3
4

: Menu Name Line ----------: Top Menu Item /Selection Line


:
: Prompt Texts for F1,F2,F3,F4

Push
buttons

Alarm indicator 6

Figure 22 Local Operator Station layout


The functions available are defined by the functionality of each
individual type of Distributed Processing Unit. Pushbuttons are
combined with lamps to indicate alarms, status of the extended
alarm system and to indicate main system functions. The Local
operator Station has the following main functions:

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

71

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Indicators
On Line
Alarm 1 -- 5

Alarm 6 -- Unit Fail

Other LED indicators

Indicates that the Local Operator Station is


connected to an active Distributed Processing
Unit.
These alarm indicators are active in an alarm
system application. Labels are ship dependent.
Indicates that the Local Operator Station is
unable to get in touch with a Distributed Processing Unit.
Many of the buttons have LED indicators.
These indicators have different meanings dependent on the menu being operated.

Display
Displays module name, menu name, tag
name etc. The display text depends on the
menu selected.
Displays the menu item that will be selected if
the Menu Down button is pressed

Line 1

Line 2
Line 3

Application dependent information

Line 4

Application dependent information

Push buttons
MENU
o UP

Used to return to the menu level above the


current menu.

MENU
i DOWN

Used to select a more detailed menu for the


item currently displayed in the second display
line.
Used to scroll the three bottom lines on the
display to select a new menu, a tag or a parameter. Display lines are scrolled down.
Used to scroll the three bottom lines for selection of a new menu, a tag or a parameter Display lines are scrolled up.
Used to adjust the value of the selected parameter (displayed in the second line). The
value is increased.
Used to adjust the value of the selected parameter (displayed in the second line). The
value is decreased.
Used to jump to the first item in the selected
menu.

SELECT
UP

SELECT
DOWN

ADJUST
UP

ADJUST
DOWN

r
e
p
n

72

DEFAULT
ENTER

Used to confirm value adjustment and store


adjusted value.

ARROW
Navigation and adjustment buttons. Used to
BUTTONS switch between overview 1 and 2. Used to
force maximum adjustment speed, and to select next and previous tags when Tag Details
are displayed.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started

1
a

F1--F4

Function buttons, the function depends on the


selected menu.

ACK

Used to acknowledge alarms.

SOUND
s OFF
t

TEST

Used to turn the alarm sound off.


Used to verify that lamps and buzzer are
functioning. Also used by the Local Operator
Station menu for other tests.

LOS top menu


DPU 001/01.00.20 _RAi16_
DPU 002/01.00.21 _RDi16_
DPU 003/01.00.22 _RAi16_
RAi16 Top Menu
Alarm History
ALARM DETAILS
Alarm Summary
ALARM DETAILS
Tag Overview Menu
RAi16 Tag Overview
1
2
3
Tag Details An.Input
Parameter Explanation
48

DPU 004/01.00.23 _RAi16_

Figure 23 Typical Local Operator Station menu structure.

2.4.2

Menu structure

The Local Operator Station menu structure is a tree structure,


similar to that found in many Microsoft Windows programs.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

73

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Use the MENU UP and MENU DOWN buttons to go


between different menu levels.

Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons to


scroll up and down each menu.

2.4.3

How to access menus

The Local Operator Station can only be connected to one


Distributed Process Unit at a time. Selecting the Distributed
Process Unit is done from the Local Operator Stations Top Menu.
Do the following:
- At power on the LOS top menu will automatically be
displayed.
1

If the top menu is not displayed, repeatedly push the MENU


UP button until the LOS top menu is displayed.
- Depending on the application, the display may look
something like this:
LOS top menu;Select dpu:
>DPU 001/01.00.20 _RAi16_
DPU 002/01.00.21 _RDi16_
DPU 003/01.00.22 _RAi16_

Figure 24 Local Operator Station top menu


- The LOS top menu presents a list of available Distributed
Processing Units (DPU) on the CAN bus.
2

Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons to


scroll the list of Distributed Process Units.

To view data for a Distributed Processing Unit move its


name to the second line in the display.

Push the MENU DOWN button to activate the top menu for
that Distributed Processing Unit.
- The online indicator is lit.

74

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started

2.4.4
1

How to move between menu levels

Moving from one menu level to another, is done by pushing


the MENU UP or MENU DOWN buttons:

2.4.5

How to move inside a menu

After selecting a Distributed Processing Unit (see How to access


menus above) the top menu for that unit is displayed. Depending
on the unit type, the display may look something like this:
- RAi16 top menu -->Tag Overview Menu
Alarm History
|Discon|

DPU 001/01.00.20

Figure 25 Distributed Processing Unit top menu.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons to


scroll the list of menu items for that Distributed Processing
Unit.

When the desired menu item is displayed on the second line,


push the MENU DOWN button. This activates that menu
item.

To leave this menu item and return to the LOS top menu,
push the F1 button.

75

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

2.5

The watch calling system


2.5.1

Overview

The watch calling system is designed to allow periodically


unmanned engine-room. It consists of:
Watch Bridge Units (WBU).
Watch Cabin Units (WCU).
Remote Operator Station.
The Watch Bridge Units are used for

Indicate Watch Responsible area.


Indicate who is On Duty.
Indicate the current alarm status.
Sounds a buzzer whenever a new alarm condition occurs and
someone is On Duty.
Allows you to contact (call) duty personnel.
The Watch Cabin Units are used for

Indicates who is On Duty.


Indicates the current alarm status.
Indicates when you are being called and who is calling.
Sounds a buzzer whenever a new alarm condition occurs.

Figure 26 Basic Watch Calling System components.

2.5.2

How does the Watch Calling repeat


alarm feature work

The repeat alarm feature of the Watch Calling System monitors all
responses to an alarm condition to ensure that the alarm is
acknowledged. The repeat alarm feature distributes the alarms
using three sequences to ensure that the alarm will not go
unacknowledged:

76

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started

The first-time/original alarm is relayed to:

- The area designated as Watch Responsible.


- The On Duty engineers Watch Cabin Units.
- The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas.
The second-time/1st repeat alarm:

After a set period of time, if the alarm remains unacknowledged,


it is repeated and relayed to:
- The area designated as Watch Responsible.
- The On Duty engineers Watch Cabin Units.
- The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas.
The third-time/2nd repeat alarm:

After a set period of time, if the alarm is still not acknowledged,


it is repeated and relayed to:
- The area designated as Watch Responsible.
- The Watch Cabin Units for ALL QUALIFIED engineers.
- The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

77

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

2.6

Using the Watch Bridge Unit


2.6.1

Explanation of controls and


indicators

Two different types of Watch Bridge Units are available:


The LCD-type has a 4 row by 40 characters display and seven
alarm groups.
The LED-type has nineteen alarm groups.
The following illustrations describes the main functionality of the
two types.
Used to SELECT alarm summary, selected
points summary or time display.

Used to display
TAG DETAILS.

Indicates the
officer having
on-duty status.

These alarms
are divided into
groups for
handling and
defining priority.

Indicate if the
engineers safety
system is active.
Used to call on
duty officers.

LAMP TEST
Push to check
that all indicators are OK.

SYSTEM FAIL
Indicates that
the unit has
failed.
Indicates the location
having watch
responsability.

Used to scroll
alarms on the
display

SOUND OFF
Push to silence
the buzzer.

Figure 27 Watch Bridge Unit, LCD type.


Indicates the
officer having
on-duty status.

These alarms
are divided into
groups for
handling and
defining priority.

Indicate if the
engineers safety
system is active.
Used to call on
duty officers.

LAMP TEST
Push to check
that all indicators are OK.

SYSTEM FAIL
Indicates that
the unit has
failed.
Indicates the location
having watch
responsability.

Used to increase
or descrease
text illumination.

SOUND OFF
Push to silence
the buzzer.

Figure 28 Watch Bridge Unit, LED type.

78

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started

The main difference between the two types are that the LCD type
can display individual alarm messages, while the LED type has a
larger number of alarm groups.
- The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) type will display date and
time when no-one is ON DUTY.
- For the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type all indicators will
be dark when no-one is ON DUTY.
- The repeat alarm function is activated if an alarm is not
acknowledged within a set period of time.

2.6.2

How to adjust illumination for LED


type panels

Background lighting: Use the arrow buttons.

Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and then use the arrow
buttons.

2.6.3

How to adjust illumination for LCD


type panels

Background lighting: Push LAMP TEST then SELECT


and use the arrow buttons.

Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrow


buttons.

2.6.4
1

How to test the panel

Push LAMP TEST to check that the LEDs illuminate and


the buzzer sounds.
- If the LEDs remain dark or the buzzer is silent, replace the
panel. There are no field serviceable parts inside.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

79

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

2.7

Using the Watch Cabin Unit


2.7.1

Explanation of controls and


indicators

Two different types of Watch Cabin Units are available:


The LCD-type has a 4 row by 40 characters display and six
alarm groups.
The LED-type has seventeen alarm groups.
The following illustrations describes the main functionality of the
two types.
Used to SELECT alarm summary, selected
points summary or time display.

Used to display
TAG DETAILS.

Indicates the
officer having
on-duty status.

These alarms
are divided into
groups for
handling and
defining priority.

SYSTEM FAIL
Indicates that
the unit has
failed.
LAMP TEST
Push to check
that all indicators are OK.

Indicates that you


have been called.

Used to scroll
alarms on the
display

SOUND OFF
Push to silence
the buzzer.

Figure 29 Watch Cabin Unit, LCD type.


Indicates the
officer having
on-duty status.

These alarms
are divided into
groups for
handling and
defining priority.

SYSTEM FAIL
Indicates that
the unit has
failed.
LAMP TEST
Push to check
that all indicators are OK.

Indicates that you


have been called.

Used to increase
or descrease
text illumination.

SOUND OFF
Push to silence
the buzzer.

Figure 30 Watch Cabin Unit, LED type.

80

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Getting started

The main difference between the two types are that the LCD type
can display individual alarm messages, while the LED type has a
larger number of alarm groups.
- The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) type will display date and
time when no-one is ON DUTY.
- For the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type all indicators will
be dark when no-one is ON DUTY.
- The repeat alarm function is activated if an alarm is not
acknowledged within a defined period of time.

2.7.2

How to respond to alarms

When an alarm condition occur the buzzer will sound and the alarm
is indicated on the Watch Cabin Unit. Do the following:
1
Push SOUND OFF.
2
Read the alarm information on the display or the text next to
the indicator.
3
4

Take appropriate action.


Check that the alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm
situation no longer exist.

2.7.3
1
2

How to adjust illumination for LED


type panels

Background lighting: Use the arrow buttons.


Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and then use the arrow
buttons.

2.7.4

How to adjust illumination for LCD


type panels

Background lighting: Push LAMP TEST then SELECT


and use the arrow buttons.

Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrow


buttons.

2.7.5
1

How to test the panel

Push LAMP TEST to check that the LEDs illuminate and


the buzzer sounds.
- If the LEDs remain dark or the buzzer is silent, replace the
panel. There are no field serviceable parts inside.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

81

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

3 ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM


3.1

Introduction
This chapter contains a detail descriptions of how to operate the
DataChief C20 alarm and monitoring system from the different
types of operator stations. It is intended for users already familiar
with the Getting Started section of this manual.
The following subjects are covered:
- Remote Operator Station
- Midi Operator Station
- Watch Bridge Unit
- Watch Cabin Unit
- ShipViewer

Figure 31 DataChief C20 Operation.

82

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

3.2

Remote Operator Station


3.2.1

How to handle alarm events

When a process parameter enters an alarm state, the following


takes place:
- The alarm text with time, date and identification is printed.
- The alarm group indicator on the Operator Control Panel
starts flashing.
- The buzzer in the Operator Control Panel is activated.
- The alarm is indicated in red in the lower right corner of the
colour graphics display.
- External alarm devices such as engine room horn are
activated.
Do the following:
SOUND
OFF

Push the SOUND OFF button.


- This turns off the external alarm devices and the buzzer.

Push the flashing alarm group button.


- This display(s) the alarms on the colour graphics display in
red.

ALARM
ACK

- This changes the alarm text from red to yellow.


4

Note

Push the ALARM ACK. button.


Attend to the alarm situation.

The last four unacknowledged alarms are always displayed on the


lower right side of the colour graphics display and may be
acknowledged without selecting group display.

3.2.2

How alarms are printed after a


black-out

Loss of ships power

The Distributed Processing Units (24 Volt DC) and the Remote
operator stations (230 Volt AC) are supported by separate
uninterruptible power supplies. The system will maintain power
for 30 minutes after a blackout. Each Distributed Processing Unit
timestamps its own alarms immediately when they occur. This
timestamping is very accurate. All alarms are sorted and printed
out according to the time they were detected.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

83

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Loss of power to Remote Operator Stations

The Distributed Processing Units store all the alarm information.


If the Remote Operator Stations loose power the the system will
continue to operate, and can be monitored or controlled from the
Local Operator Stations. When power is restored to the Remote
Operator Stations all alarms are sorted and printed out according
to the time they were detected.
Loss of power to Distributed Processing units

If you loose power to the Distributed Processing Units the system


will not be working for the duration of the power interruption. All
settings are how ever retained and as soon as power is restored the
system will be up and running.

3.2.3

How to display alarm summary

This function will display all active alarms. Do the following:


ALARM
SUMMARY

Push the ALARM SUMMARY button.


- A summary of all active and unacknowledged alarms are
displayed on the colour graphics display.

Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go


backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page
exists.

3.2.4

How to display alarm history

This function displays a chronological list of alarm events. Do the


following:
ALARM
HISTORY

Push the ALARM HISTORY button.


- A complete chronological list of all alarm events are
displayed on the colour graphics display. The newest alarms
are displayed on top.
* Unacknowledged alarms are displayed in red.
* Acknowledged alarms are displayed in yellow.
* Cleared alarm conditions are displayed in green.

Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go


backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page
exists.

3.2.5

How to display alarm group


information

This function is used to view the tags in an alarm group. The value
and alarm limits for each tag is displayed. Do the following:

84

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

GROUP
DISPLAY

Push the GROUP DISPLAY button.


- The prompt Select group: is displayed in the lower left of
the colour graphics display.

Type in an alarm group number and push ENTER, or push


the desired alarm group button on the Operator Control
Panel.
- The group name is displayed with the tag highlighted at the
top.

Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go


backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page
exists.

3.2.6

How to display counters and reset


counters

This function is used to view running hours for pumps, main


engine, accumulated values for analogue sensors etc. The total
accumulated value and lap value for each tag is displayed. Do the
following:
- Requires that Reset Counters is enabled

COUNTER
DISPLAY

See How to enable resetting of counters on page 96.

Push the COUNTER DISPLAY button.


- The system counters are displayed.

A counter value may be changed by using the UP/DOWN


arrow keys to highlight it.

Push ENTER to address it.

- The prompt Enter new Counter value: is displayed in the


lower left of the colour graphics display.
4
Type in the new counter value.
5

Push ENTER.
- It is possible to reset all counters selecting Reset all
counters or Reset all lap counters.

See How to display system information on page 92.

3.2.7

How to display offscan alarms

This function is used to view tags set to offscan. The value and
alarm limit for each tag are displayed. Do the following:

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

85

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

GROUP
DISPLAY

Push the GROUP DISPLAY button.


- The prompt Select group: is displayed in the lower left of
the colour graphics display.

Type in -2 (minus 2).

Push ENTER.

2
- Offscan tags are displayed.
4

Use the PREVIOUS PAGE and NEXT PAGE buttons to go


backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page
exists.

3.2.8

How to toggle between group and


alarm display

Do the following:
GROUP
DISPLAY

Push the GROUP DISPLAY button.


- The prompt Select group: is displayed in the lower left of
the colour graphics display.

Type in a group number, or push the desired group button on


the Operator Control Panel.

Push ENTER
- The group name is displayed with the tag highlighted at the
top.

GROUP
DISPLAY

Push the GROUP/ALARM button.


- For each push of the button the display toggles between all
tags and tags in alarm state.

3.2.9

How to acknowledge alarms

Separate and group alarms can be acknowledged while a mimic-,


an alarm group- or an alarm summary display is active. There are
three ways to acknowledge alarms:
Method 1

To acknowledge up to tree of the active alarms displayed in the


lower right corner of colour graphics display do the following:

86

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

ALARM
ACK

Push the ALARM ACK. button.


- A maximum of three alarms are acknowledged at the same
time. Any unacknowledged alarms will replace those just
acknowledged.

Method 2

Do the following:
ALARM
HISTORY

ALARM
ACK

Push the ALARM HISTORY button.


- The alarm history is displayed.

Push the ALARM ACK. button.


- A maximum of three alarms are acknowledged at the same
time. The alarm text turns yellow. When the alarm condition
returns to normal, the text turns green.

Method 3

Do the following:
ALARM
GROUP

ALARM
ACK

Push the ALARM GROUP button.

Push the ALARM ACK. button.


- All active alarms shown on the colour graphics monitor are
acknowledged. If there are more unacknowledged alarms
push PAGE DOWN to acknowledge the additional alarms.
The alarm texts changes from red to yellow. When all alarms
have been acknowledged the alarm button is steady lit. When
all alarm conditions in the selected alarm group have
returned to normal, the colour graphics display is cleared.

3.2.10 How to set day, dusk or night


viewing conditions
When the Remote Operator Station is placed on the bridge or in a
similar places it is useful to set the viewing conditions for day, dusk
or night viewing. You can also turn the screen saver on/off and
adjusting the time delay before the screen saver is turned on.
Monitor Dimmer Function
MONITOR
OCP
DISPLAY

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Push the MONITOR OCP DISPLAY button.

87

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons or the trackball to select


Day, Dusk/Dawn or Night.

Push ENTER.

Push 1.

Push ENTER.
- The selected viewing condition is set.

OCP Dimmer Function

1-7

Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons or the trackball to select


the lamp intensity you wish to change.

Push ENTER.

Type in a number between 1 and 7.

Push ENTER.
- 7 will give the brightest light.

Screen Saver

10

Use the arrow buttons or the trackball to select Screen Saver


Delay.

11

Push ENTER.
- The text Enter new delay in minutes (0 to turn saver off):
is displayed on the lower left side of the colour graphics
display.

12

Type in the delay time.

13

Push ENTER.
- Maximum delay time is 60 minutes.

Note

The screen saver is automatically turned of if any of the input


devices are activated or a new alarm occurs.

3.2.11 How to print a Complete log


A remote operator station can only be connected to one printer.
This printer will have a defined function:
Alarm printer

88

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Log printer
If there is only one printer in the system, the printer will serve both
functions. Do the following to activate printouts:
MISC.
LOGS

Push the MISC. LOGS button.

Select Complete log using the UP/DOWN arrow buttons.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Complete log (1=start, 0=abort) is displayed
in the lower left of the display.

Push 1 to select printout.

Push ENTER.
- The printer starts printing the log.
- Status indication for all other logs will change to BUSY.
- When the printout is completed, status indication for all logs
will go back to READY.
M/S EAGLE
KALDNES
COMPLETE LOG

NORCONTROL AUTOMATION A/S


HULL NO: 10
93--12--27 12:16:45

Tagname

Tag description

Func Value

AE001
AE002
FO001
FO001
LO001
LO001
ME001
ME002
ME003
ME004
ME005

STARTING AIR
CHARGE AIR
F.O. PRESS
F.O. TEMP
L.O. PRESS
L.O. TEMP
STARTING AIR
CYL.1 LUBRICATION
CYL.2 LUBRICATION
CYL.3 LUBRICATION
CYL.4 LUBRICATION

LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP

OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

Eng.unit Alarm
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

DC2000
PAGE 1
Low Lim. High lim.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(

,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,

)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

Figure 32 Typical example of Complete log.

3.2.12 How to print an Alarm Summery


log
ALARM
SUMMARY

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use the
UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Alarm Summary.

89

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

3.2.13 How to print a Level Correction log


- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use the
UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Level Correction.

LEVEL
CORRECTION

3.2.14 How to print a Tank log


- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use the
UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Tank log.

TANK
LOG

3.2.15 How to print a Counters log


- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use the
UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Counters log.

COUNTER
LOG

3.2.16 How to print an Inhibit log


- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use the
UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Inhibit log.

INHIBIT
LOG

3.2.17 How to print an Offscan log


- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use the
UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Offscan log.

OFFSCAN
LOG

3.2.18 How to print Group log


Do the following to activate printouts:
MISC.
LOGS

Push the MISC. LOGS button.

Select Group log using the UP/DOWN arrow buttons.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Select group log: is displayed in the lower left
of the display.
4
Type in the group number.
5
6
7

90

Push ENTER
Or push one of the alarm group buttons.
Push ENTER.
- The printer will start printing the log.
- Status indication for all other logs will change to BUSY.
- When the printout is completed, status indication for all logs
will go back to READY.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

3.2.19 How to print a Selected points log


A Selected points log can only be printed from the Remote
Operator Station fitted configured to do that.
Note

Printing a Selected Points log on demand, will clear the interval


set for printing of Selected points log.

MISC.
LOGS

See How to set interval for Selected points log on page 111.

Push the MISC. LOGS button.

Select Sel. Points Log using the UP/DOWN arrow buttons.

Push ENTER.

- The prompt Selectlog number: is displayed in the lower left


of the display.
- The note Selected Log Interval will be deleted is
displayed.
4
Type in the number (between 1 and 5) of the selected points
log you wish to print.
5

Push ENTER .
- The printer starts printing the log.
- Status indication for all other logs will change to BUSY.
- When the printout is completed, status indication for all logs
will go back to READY.

3.2.20 How to stop a printout


MISC.
LOGS

Push the MISC. LOGS button.

Select the log you want to stop using the UP/DOWN arrow
buttons.

Push ENTER.

Push 0 to stop the printout.


- The printing stops when the printer buffer is empty.

Printer responsible parameters

- These parameters indicates which Remote Operator Station


is responsible for printing alarms and logs.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

91

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Printer set-up parameters

- A list of current printer settings, such as printer type and


form feed length. The later is useful when ordering printer
paper. These parameters are normally set during
commissioning.

3.2.21 How to display system information


This function is used to display various system information such
as ship and station information, software version, functions,
limited access override etc. and allows further access to displaying
and controlling system parameters. Do the following:
SYSTEM
INFO
DISPLAY

Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.


- The system information display is shown on the colour
graphics display.

3.2.22 About password access


SYSTEM
INFO
DISPLAY

An access control system limits the possibilities to acknowledge


alarms and change system parameters or information. The status
of this system is available by pushing System Information
Display.

Figure 33 System Information Display.

92

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

The access control system is based on the use of passwords. The


following password levels are available:
- Acknowledge: Allows acknowledging of alarms. Used to
receive and acknowledge alarms from Remote Operator
Stations that normally wouldnt receive them, such as on the
bridge. When typing in the password you can also set the
expiration time.The password expiration time can be set to
any number of minutes. When set to 0 the password will not
automatically expire. Push the Release Access button in Tag
Details or change the status to NO in the System
Configuration Display.
- Mimic: Allows system control through the mimic pictures.
Used to control (start, stop, open, close, etc.) components
you normally dont have access to, such as for instance
operating the power management from the cargo control
room. The password expiration time can be set to any
number of minutes. When set to 0 the password will not
automatically expire. Push the Release Access button in Tag
Details or change the status to NO in the System
Configuration Display.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

93

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Figure 34 Password window.


- Commissioning: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm
delays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups,
enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for each
Remote Operator Station. Access automatically expire after
30 minutes or when pushing the Release Access button in
Tag Details.
- Superuser: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays,
event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. Access
automatically expire after 30 minutes or when pushing the
Release Access button in Tag Details.
- Password: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays
and event limits. This password does not automatically
expire. Push the Release Access button in Tag Details or
change the status to NO in the System Configuration
Display.
- Yes: In the System Configuration Display indicates that
access at this level is available.
- No: In the System Configuration Display indicates that
access at this level is not available.
Note

Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allows
unauthorized access to vital system functions.
If you try to make changes without having inserted the right
password the system will automatically request it.

3.2.23 How to display Distributed


Processing Unit information
This procedure allows display of all parameters for each tag such
as values , alarm status, alarm limits etc. Do the following:
SYSTEM
INFO
DISPLAY

94

Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.


- The system information display is shown on the colour
graphics display.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Unit
display.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter unit number: is displayed on the lower
left side of the colour graphics display.

Type in the number of the DPU.

Push ENTER.
- The information about the selected processing unit is
displayed.

Use NEXT PAGE or PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to select


the next or previous Distributed Processing Unit.

3.2.24 Info field enable


- This parameter is for Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems use
only.

3.2.25 How to enable changing of Eng.


unit/counts
SYSTEM
INFO
DISPLAY

Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.


- The system information display is shown on the colour
graphics display.

Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Eng.
unit change.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Eng.unit counts/change enable (1=on, 0=off):
is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics
display.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Type 1.

Push ENTER to enable changing of Eng.unit/counts.

Refer to page 117 for information on How to change tag


parameters for an analogue channel and page 120 for
information on How to change tag parameters for a digital
channel.

95

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

3.2.26 How to enable resetting of


counters
This function is used to reset counters for running hours for pumps,
main engine, accumulated values for analogue sensors etc.
SYSTEM
INFO
DISPLAY

Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.


- The system information display is shown on the colour
graphics display.

Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Reset
counters.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Reset all counter enable (1=on, 0=off): is
displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.

Type 1 .

Push ENTER to enable resetting of all counters in the


COUNTERS DISPLAY.

Refer to How to display and reset counters on page 85 for


more information.

3.2.27 How to override limitations to


acknowledge alarms
This function allows acknowledging of alarms from Remote
Operator Stations which would not normally allow it.
SYSTEM
INFO
DISPLAY

Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.


- The system information display is shown on the colour
graphics display.

Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after


Acknowledge.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter acknowledge limit. override password:
is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics
display.
4
Type in the password.
5

96

Push ENTER.
- The text Acknowledge limitation override enabled is
displayed in the function window.
- You may now acknowledge alarms from this Remote
Operator Station.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Note

The text ACCESS OVERRIDE ACK will be displayed in the status


area until the override is reset, refer page 65.

3.2.28 How to override limitations to


control pumps and valves
This function allows controlling of pumps and valves from Remote
Operator Stations which would not normally allow it.
SYSTEM
INFO
DISPLAY

Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.


- The system information display is shown on the colour
graphics display.

Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after


Mimic.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter mimic limit. override password: is
displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.

Type in the password.

Push ENTER.
- The text Mimic access override enabled is displayed.
- You may now control pumps and valves from this Remote
Operator Station.

Note

The text ACCESS OVERRIDE MIM will be displayed in the


status area until the override is reset, refer page 65.

3.2.29 How to silence the Operator


Control Panel buzzer
SYSTEM
INFO
DISPLAY

Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.


- The system information display is shown on the colour
graphics display.

Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after OCP
Buzzer silent.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter OCP Buzzer disable password: is
displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Type in the password.

97

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Push ENTER.
- The Operator Control Panel (OCP) buzzer is now disabled.

Note

The text ACCESS OVERRIDE BUZ will be displayed in the status


area until the disabling is turned off, refer page 65.

3.2.30 How to set tags to offscan

Refer to page 117 How to change parameters for an analogue


channel or page 120 for How to change parameters for a digital
channel.

3.2.31 How to change alarm limits

Refer to page 117 How to change parameters for an analogue


channel or page 120 for How to change parameters for a digital
channel.

3.2.32 How to change alarm delay

Refer to page 117 How to change parameters for an analogue


channel or page 120 for How to change parameters for a digital
channel.

3.2.33 How to access the Watch Calling


configuration
This function allows configuration of the Watch Calling System.
SYSTEM
INFO
DISPLAY

Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.


- The system information display is shown on the colour
graphics display.

Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after


Configuration Menu.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter 1 to Configure Watch Call: is displayed
at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.

Type 1.

Push ENTER.
- The Watch Calling configuration pages are displayed.

98

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Use the use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE


buttons to go between the pages.

3.2.34 How to set the On Duty engineer


The engineer to be assigned to On Duty must have qualifications
that comply with the on duty assignment. The system verifies each
duty assignment by checking the engineer qualifications table. A
message will appear on the screen if the engineer is not qualified
for the assigned duty. The following example shows the procedure
for selecting an engineer:

f
f
f
f
f
f

Officer On Duty
Officer
Qual.Duty
Chief Engineer E
N
1st Engineer
E
E
2nd Engineer
E
N
3rd Engineer
N
N
Chief Cargo
M
N
1st Cargo
C
C

Figure 35 On Duty engineer including qualifications.


Explanation to the abbreviations:
* E - Engine duty
* C - Cargo duty
* M - Multipurpose duty
* N - No qualifications
- This procedure requires that the system is in engine control
room watch.
1
Use the procedure as described in How to access the Watch
Calling configuration on page 98.
2

Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go


between the pages.

Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select the


On Duty engineer.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Officer on Engine duty (1=Engine duty): is
displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

99

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Type 1.

Push ENTER.
- The engineer On Duty has been set - the indicator turns
green.

3.2.35 How to select the Watch


Responsible location
Note

This procedure requires that an engineer is set to on duty. Refer to


How to set the On Duty engineer above.
The engine control room is the default Watch Responsible
location. Use the following procedure to select an alternative
Watch Responsible location. This can be done in the following
three ways:
On the Operator Control Panel

Push the button for the watch responsible location you want
(BRIDGE WATCH, ENG WATCH).
- The indicator for the new location will flash until accepted
at that location, for example the Watch Bridge Unit panel on
the bridge.
- The indicator will be steady lit when the watch responsibility
has been accepted. The indicator for the previous location is
switched off - not lit.

On the Watch Bridge Unit

Push the button for the watch responsible location you want
(BRIDGE WATCH, ENG WATCH buttons).
- The indicator for the new location will flash until accepted
at that location, for example the Remote Operator Station in
the engine control room.
- The indicator will be steady lit when the watch responsibility
has been accepted. The indicator for the previous location is
switched off - not lit.

On the Remote operator station display

100

Use the procedure as described in How to access the Watch


Calling configuration on page 98.

Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go


between the pages.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select the


Watch Responsibility Area.
Responsibility
f Bridge Watch
F Engine CR Watch
Figure 36 Watch responsibility location before change.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Activate operation (1=active): is displayed at
the lower left side of the colour graphics display.

Type 1.

Push ENTER.
Responsibility
F Bridge Watch
f Engine CR Watch
Figure 37 Watch responsibility location after change.
- The indicator for the new location will flash until accepted
at that location, for example the Watch Bridge Unit panel on
the bridge.
- The indicator will be steady lit when the watch responsibility
has been accepted. The indicator for the previous location is
switched off - not lit.

3.2.36 How to call the On Duty engineer


or All engineers
From the Remote Operator Station, you can call the On Duty
engineers, or All engineers with engine or cargo qualifications, or
with engine and cargo (multipurpose qualifications). The
following is an example for calling all qualified engineers (Call All
Engine) and for calling the On Duty engineers (Call Engine Duty)
Individual ship configurations may vary. This can be done in the
following three ways:
On the Operator Control Panel
CALL
DUTY
ENG.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Push the CALL DUTY ENG. or CALL ALL ENG. button.


- The call indicator will be lit and the selected engineer called.

101

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

CALL
ALL
ENG.

To cancel the call push the button again.

On the Watch Bridge Unit


CALL
DUTY
ENG.

CALL
ALL
ENG.

Push the CALL DUTY ENG. or CALL ALL ENG. button.


- The call indicator will be lit and the selected engineer called.

To cancel the call push the button again.

On the Remote operator station display

Use the procedure as described in How to access the Watch


Calling configuration on page 98.

Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go


between the pages.

Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select the


engineers to call.
Calling officers
f Calling Engine Duty
f Calling Cargo Duty
F Calling All Engine
f Calling All Cargo
Figure 38 Calls all engine qualified officers.
Calling officers
F Calling Engine Duty
f Calling Cargo Duty
f Calling All Engine
f Calling All Cargo
Figure 39 Calls the On Duty engineer.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Activate call (1=Activate): is displayed at the
lower left side of the colour graphics display.

1
102

Type 1.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Push ENTER.

- The call indicator will be lit and the selected engineer called.
7
To cancel the call repeat the procedure selecting CANCEL
CALL (0=cancel):.

3.2.37 How to define the engineer


qualifications
When a new engineer reports aboard with qualifications different
from the engineer being replaced, the qualifications table needs to
be updated. The following example shows a qualification change
for the the 3rd engineer:
Officers Qualifications
Officers
Chief Engineer
1st Engineer
2nd Engineer
3rd Engineer
Chief Officer
1st Officer

Qualifications
Engine
Engine
Engine
Engine
Multipurpose
Cargo

Figure 40 The qualification section checks that the On Duty


engineer is qualified for the assigned duty.
1

Use the procedure as described in How to access the Watch


Calling configuration on page 98.

Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go


between the pages.

Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select the


qualifications for the engineer.

Push ENTER.

- The prompt Enter qual (0=None, 1=Engine, 2=Cargo,


3=Multipurpose): is displayed at the lower left side of the
colour graphics display.
5
Type the relevant number.
6

Push ENTER.
- The new qualifications have been set.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

103

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

3.2.38 How to define watch calling


Off-Duty mode
When an engineer or group of engineers are on duty the Watch
Bridge and Watch Cabin units are automatically set to On Duty
mode. When an engineer is Off Duty his/her panel(s) can be
defined as either active or passive:
What is Off Duty active

The panels will not sound an alarm but will continue to display
alarm information. Unacknowledged alarms will have an * in
front.
What is Off Duty passive

The panels will not sound an alarm. LCD-type panels will display
date and time information only. Pushing the controls on a
LCD-type panel will display the alarms. Unacknowledged alarms
will have an * in front. (The LEDs on the LED-type panels will
remain dark).
1

Use the procedure as described in How to access the Watch


Calling configuration on page 98.

Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go


between the pages.

Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select the


engineer.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter panel(s) mode(1=Active, 0=Passive): is
displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.

Type the relevant number.

Push ENTER.
- The new Off-Duty mode have been set.

104

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Off-Duty Panel Mode


Officers
Chief Engineer
1st Engineer
2nd Engineer
3rd Engineer
Chief Officer
1st Officer

Mode
Active
Passive
Passive
Passive
Passive
Passive

Figure 41 engineers Off-Duty panel mode.

3.2.39 How to define Watch Calling panel


groups for on duty engineers
Each On Duty engineer has a group of panels defined as
belonging to that engineer-position. These are the panels in
his/her cabin, office and in public areas. When an engineer is On
duty, each of these panels are in On Duty active mode. Since each
ships configuration is different the illustration may differ from
your system.
Note

This configuration can only be done at the master Remote


Operator Station.
1

Use the procedure as described in How to access the Watch


Calling configuration on page 98.

Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go


between the pages.

Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select the


panel group (Chief Engineer, 1st Engineer etc.).

Push ENTER.

- The prompt Enter Group number to assign panel to: is


displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
5
Type the relevant number.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Push ENTER.

Type in the group number.

Push ENTER.

105

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

KONGSBERG

WATCH CALLING CONFIGURATION

Panel Configuration
Panel S/N
00000000000001
00000000000002
00000000000003
00000000000004
00000000000005
00000000000006
00000000000007
00000000000008
00000000000009

Group
Chief Engineer
1st Engineer
2nd Engineer
3rd Engineer
Chief Officer
1st Officer
Public
Public
Public

Mode
Operational
Operational
Connecting
Operational
Operational
Operational
Operational
Operational
Operational

Apply Changes

Date
Time

This column lists the time and


date of change for each panel
Last Change

11:07:41
12:00:00
02:03:00
10:10:23
10:22:09
10:28:34
10:32:27
10:44:12
10/56:02

Each panel has a unique serial number. Each panel can be


defined to a group so that all alarms to the On Duty
officer are sent to all panels defined for the position, and to
public areas.
For example, all panels defined as Chief Engineer
will be active when the Chief Engineer is On Duty.

1 of 2

08/11--2001
12/12--2001
06/10--2001
07/10--2001
07/10--2001
07/10--2001
07/10--2001
07/10--2001
07/10--2001

Groups

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Public
Chief Engineer
1st Engineer
2nd Engineer
3rd Engineer
Chief Officer
1st Officer

Message area which tells you the codes to choose the selection.

Figure 42 One of the Watch Calling configuration pages.


9

Place the cursor on the display area APPLY CHANGES and


push the READ button.
- The change is now selected.

10

To apply the change push 1.

11

Push ENTER.
Groups
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Public
Chief Engineer
1st Engineer
2nd Engineer
3rd Engineer
Chief Officer
1st Officer

Figure 43 Available Watch Cabin Unit groups.

106

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Panel Configuration
Panel S/N
00000000000001
00000000000002
00000000000003
00000000000004
00000000000005
00000000000006
00000000000007
00000000000008
00000000000009

Group
Chief Engineer
1st Engineer
2nd Engineer
3rd Engineer
Chief Officer
1st Officer
Public
Public
Public

Figure 44 Panel serial numbers and group assignment.

3.2.40 How to change time zone


Used to change time zone when sailing eastward or westward.
SYSTEM
INFO
DISPLAY

Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.


- The system information display is shown on the colour
graphics display.

Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after


Timezone.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter password: is displayed in the function
window at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
4
Type in the password.
5

Push ENTER.
- The following dialogue is displayed.

6
Note

Select the new time zone and push OK.

If the system is fitted with a master clock, all time changes must be
made there.

3.2.41 How to change system time


Note

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Use the change time zone function above when going between
different time zones. The DataChief C20 system time is set to
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC formerly known as GMT), and
only minor corrections such as if the time is not quite correct should
be made here!

107

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Figure 45 Change Time zone dialogue box.


SYSTEM
INFO
DISPLAY

Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.


- The system information display is shown on the colour
graphics display.

Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after


Change system time.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter password: is displayed at the lower left
side of the colour graphics display.

Type in the password.

Push ENTER.
- The following dialogue is displayed.

Figure 46 Set system time dialogue box.

108

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Type in the local date and time and push OK.


- The new date and time is transferred to the other Remote
Operator Stations in the network if the Remote Operator
Station you are working at is set up to transfer this data.

7
Note

Select the time zone and push OK.

If the system is fitted with a master clock, all time changes must be
made there.

3.2.42 How to make your own list of


selected tags
The system allows you to create up to five display pages containing
your own selection of tags. Each page can include up to 20 tags.
Tags can be combined from different alarm groups. Do the
following:
SELECTED
POINTS
DISPLAY

1-5
Note

Push the SELECTED POINTS DISPLAY button.


- In the function window in the lower left corner of the colour
graphics display the text Log no. is shown.

Enter a number between 1 and 5.

If you want to create a new display the number should not


previously have been used to create a selected points display!
- The texts ADD, DELETE and EXIT will be displayed at the
top of the screen.
3

Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons to highlight ADD.

Push ENTER.
- The text Select group: will be displayed in bottom left of the
colour graphics display.

Push the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags from
or enter the alarm group number.

Push ENTER.
- The tags in the selected alarm group are displayed on the
right side of the colour graphics display.

Use the arrow buttons to highlight the tags you want.

Push ENTER to select it.


- The selected tag is displayed on the left side of the colour
graphics display.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

109

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

If the tag list fills more than one page use the NEXT PAGE
and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between them.

10

To select an other tag from the same alarm group go to 5. To


select a tag from a different alarm group go to 3.

11

Should you want to remove a tag from your list use the arrow
buttons to highlight DELETE.

12

Push ENTER.

13

Use the arrow buttons to select the tag you want to remove.

14

Push ENTER.

- The tag is removed from the list.


15 Use the arrow buttons to highlight EXIT.
16

Push ENTER.
- Your list of selected tags is shown with values and limits.

3.2.43 How to change a list of selected


tags
Your list of selected tags can be modified at any time. Remember
there is a maximum of 20 tags per list. Do the following:
SELECTED
POINTS
DISPLAY

Push the SELECTED POINTS DISPLAY button.

- In the lower left corner of the colour graphics display the text
Select log number: is shown.
2
Enter the number of the selected tags list you want to change
(between 1 and 5).
3

Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select


CONFIG in the lower right corner.

- The texts ADD, DELETE and EXIT will be displayed at the


top of the screen.
4
Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow button to highlight ADD if
you want to add tags and push ENTER. If you want to
DELETE tags go to 9.
- The text Select group: will be displayed in bottom left of the
colour graphics display.
5
Push one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags
from.
- The tags in the selected alarm group are displayed on the
right side of the colour graphics display.

110

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Use the arrow buttons to highlight the tags you want.

Push ENTER to select it.


- The tag is displayed on the left side of the colour graphics
display.

If the tag list fills more than one page use the NEXT PAGE
and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between them.

- To select an other tag from the same alarm group go to 6. To


select a tag from a different alarm group go to 4.
9
Should you want to remove a tag from your list use the arrow
buttons to highlight DELETE.
10

Push ENTER.

11

Use the arrow buttons to select the tag you want to remove.

12

Push ENTER.

- The tag is removed from the list.


13 Use the arrow buttons to highlight EXIT.
14

Push ENTER.
- Your updated list of tags will be displayed with values and
limits.

3.2.44 How to set the interval for


selected points log
Note

A Selected points log can only be printed from the Remote


Operator Station configured to print this log.
SELECTED
POINTS
DISPLAY

1-5

Push the SELECTED POINTS DISPLAY button.


- In the lower left corner of the colour graphics display the text
Select log number: is shown.

Enter the number of the selected tags list you want to log
(between 1 and 5).

Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select


CONFIG in the lower right corner.

- The texts ADD, DELETE ,EXIT and INTERVAL will be


displayed at the top of the screen.
4
Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow button to highlight
INTERVAL.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

111

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Push ENTER.
- The text Enter log printout interval (hh.mm): will be
displayed in bottom left of the colour graphics display.

Type in the print interval using the specified format (hh.mm)


and push ENTER.

Push the SPACE button and ENTER when you want to


remove the interval.

3.2.45 How to make your own trend


display
The system allows you to create up to five different trend log
displays containing your own selection of tags. Each display can
include up to eight tags. Tags can be combined from different
alarm groups. The trend log displays input as curves as a function
of time. Do the following:
SELECTED
TRENDS
DISPLAY

1-5
Note

Push the SELECT TREND DISPLAY button.


- In the lower left corner of the colour graphics display the text
Select log number: is shown.

Enter a number between 1 and 5.

The number should not previously have been used to create a trend
display!
- The texts ADD, DELETE and EXIT will be displayed at the
top of the screen.
3
Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow button to highlight ADD.
4

Push ENTER.

- The text Select group: will be displayed in the bottom left


of the colour graphics display.
5
Push one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags
from or enter the alarm group number.
6

Push ENTER.

- The tags in the selected alarm group are displayed on the


right side of the colour graphics display.
7
Use the arrow buttons to highlight the tags you want.

112

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Push ENTER to select it.


- The tag is displayed on the left side of the colour graphics
display.

If the tag list fills more than one page use the NEXT PAGE
and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between them.

10

To select an other tag from the same alarm group go to 5. To


select a tag from a different alarm group go to 3.

11

Should you want to remove a tag from your list use the arrow
buttons to highlight DELETE.

12

Push ENTER.

13

Use the arrow buttons to select the tag you want to remove.

14

Push ENTER.
- The tag is removed from the list.

15

Use the arrow buttons to highlight EXIT.

16

Push ENTER.
- Your trend display of selected tags will be displayed.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

113

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Figure 47 Typical trend log display.


Explanation to the trendlog display

Selected trend tags: Up to eight trend tags can be monitored


simultaneously. These are displayed in different colours with
their current value. Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key
to select one of the tags. The value scale will then be displayed
in the actual unit (temp, pressure, etc.)for that tag, using trend
low and high range as minimum and maximum values. To select
tags see How to make your own trend display above.
Value scale: Normally 0 to 100% - white scale. When selecting
one of the trend tags (see Selected trend tags) the scale will be
displayed in the same colour as that tag, and will be scaled in the
unit for that tag.
- Trend low range: The minimum value for the value scale.
Used when selecting one of the trend tags (see Selected trend
tags). Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key to select
it and type in a new value.
- Trend high range: The maximum value for the value scale.
Used when selecting one of the trend tags (see Selected trend
tags). Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key to select
it and type in a new value.
Time scale: The selected time scale for the trend display.

114

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Time span: You can vary the time span of the trend display
between 6 minutes and 120 hours. Push the button so that the
current time span is displayed and use the UP/DOWN arrow
keys to change it.
Grid: Pushing the button turns the grid on/off.
Stop: Pushing the button freezes the trend display (no new
samples are added). Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow keys to
move the trend cursor along the time scale. The value for each
tag will be displayed as the cursor moves along the time scale.
Config: Push this button to add or delete trend tags. See How
to make your own trend display above.

3.2.46 How to make your own bargraph


display
The system allows you to create up to five different bargraph
displays containing your own selection of tags. Each display can
include up to six tags. Tags can be combined from different alarm
groups. Do the following:
SELECT
BARGR.
DISPLAY

1-5
Note

Push the SELECT BARGR. DISPLAY button.


- In the lower left corner of the colour graphics display the text
Select log number: is shown.

Enter a number between 1 and 5.

The number should not previously have been used to create a


bargraph display!
- The texts ADD, DELETE and EXIT will be displayed at the
top of the screen.
3

Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons to highlight ADD.

Push ENTER.
- The text Select group: will be displayed in the bottom left
of the colour graphics display.

Push one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags
from or enter the alarm group number.

Push ENTER.
- The tags in the selected alarm group are displayed on the
right side of the colour graphics display.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Use the arrow buttons to highlight the tags you want .

115

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Push ENTER to select it.


- The tag is displayed on the left side of the colour graphics
display.

If the tag list fills more than one page use the NEXT PAGE
and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between them.
To select an other tag from the same alarm group go to 5. To
select a tag from a different alarm group go to 3.
Should you want to remove a tag from your list use the arrow
buttons to highlight DELETE.

10
11

12
13

Push ENTER.
Use the arrow buttons to select the tag you want to remove.

14

Push ENTER.
- The tag is removed from the list.
15 Use the arrow buttons to highlight EXIT.
16

Push ENTER.
- Your bargraph display of selected tags will be displayed.

Figure 48 Typical bargraph display.


Explanation to the bargraph display

Selected bargraph tags: Up to six tags can be displayed


simultaneously. These are displayed with their current value. To
select tags see How to make your own trend display above.

116

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Tag number: The tag number for the selected tag.


Scale: Bargraph scale
- Bargraph high range: The maximum value for the scale.
Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key to select it and
type in a new maximum value.
- Bargraph low range: The minimum value for the scale. Use
the TRACKBALL and the READ key to select it and type
in a new minimum value.
Current value bar: The value of the tag displayed as a
bargraph.
Current value: The current value of the tag. The numbers are
displayed in green when the value is inside the limits and red
when outside.
Limits bar: Displays the minimum and maximum alarm limits
- if any.
Maximum alarm limit: The bar is green above this limit and
red below.
Minimum alarm limit: The bar is red above this limit and
green below.
Config: Push this button to add or delete bargraph tags. See
How to make your own bargraph display above.

3.2.47 How to change tag parameters for


an analogue channel
This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analogue
measuring points.
GROUP
DISPLAY

Push the GROUP DISPLAY button.


- The text Select group: will be displayed in the bottom left
of the colour graphics display.

Type in an alarm group number and push ENTER, or push


one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags
from.
- The alarm group is displayed on the colour graphics display.

TAG
DETAILS

Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select a tag.

Push the TAG DETAILS button.


- The parameters for that tag is displayed.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

There are three buttons at the bottom of the window. Push


them to display the following:

117

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Figure 49 Tag detail display.


* Tag Details: Shows the normal tag details display. All
parameters displayed here can be changed by the
operator. Pushing the Offscan Enable stops checking this
tag against alarm limits. Pushing the Offscan Disable
starts checking this tag against alarm limits. Pushing
Offscan Value allows you to to insert a simulated value
when the tag is off scan. This may be used while waiting
to replace a defective sensor.
* Advanced Tag Details: Shows a full list of all tag details.
All parameters displayed in bold characters can be
changed by the user without a password. Use the
Parameter Filter on the right side to reduce the number
of parameters displayed.
* Tag application: Lists other tags related to this tag. Only
used for advanced applications and system
commissioning.
6

To change a variable point to it ,and push the READ button


on the operator control panel.

Type in the new value and push OK.

- The display picture is updated and the new value is


transferred to the Distributed Processing Unit and any other
Remote Operator Station in the system.
The following table explains what the the different parameters for
analogue input tags are used for.

118

Parameter
name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Tag name

Text

Yes

Unique code describing a tag

Tag number

Number

No

Unique number describing a tag

Description

Text

Yes

Description of a tag

Function

Text

No

Short code describing the function of


the tag

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Parameter
name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Value

Number

No

Measured value scaled to technical


value and Filtered

Distributed Processing Unit


number
Channel number

Number

No

Unique number of the node

Number

No

Number of the channel connected

Channel Type

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Channel type is the specification of how


the input signal is handled and scaled

Operator Control
Panel alarm
group
Bridge group

Number

No

All tags in the system are divided into


different groups.

Number

No

All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups.

Autolog

Number

Yes

Included in the autolog list

Noonlog

Number

Yes

Included in the noonlog list

Eventlog

Number

Yes

Included in the eventlog list

Offscan

Number

Yes

Included in the offscan log list

Offscan value

Number

Yes

Included in the offscan log list

Inhibited by tag

Text

No

Tag to inhibit this channel

Access group

Number

Yes

Limited access id. to acknowledge this


alarm

Limit Alarm Low


Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm High

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm High


High

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Event Low


Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event High

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event High


High

Number

Yes

Event limit

Filter Time *)

Number

Yes

Time in 100 milliseconds

Dynamic Dead
Band *)

Number

Yes

Report value dead band limit

Counts Low *)

Number

Yes

A/D minimum value

Counts High *)

Number

Yes

A/D maximum value

Eng.Units Low *)

Number

Yes

Instrument minimum value

Eng.Units High
*)

Number

Yes

Instruments maximum value

Alarm On
Delay1

Number

Yes

High/ Low delay in 1 second

119

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Parameter
name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Alarm Off
Delay1

Number

Yes

High/ Low delay in 1 second

Alarm On
Delay2

Number

Yes

HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second

Alarm Off
Delay2

Number

Yes

HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second

Inhibit On Delay

Number

Yes

Inhibit delay in 1 second

Inhibit Off Delay

Number

Yes

Inhibit delay in 1 second

Table 2 Analogue input channel parameters.


*) Requires Eng.Unit change = 1 in System info. display.

3.2.48 How to change tag parameters for


a digital channel
This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for digital
measuring points.
GROUP
DISPLAY

Push the GROUP DISPLAY button.


- The text Select group: will be displayed in the bottom left
of the colour graphics display.

Type in an alarm group number and push ENTER, or push


one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags
from.
- The alarm group is displayed on the colour graphics display.

TAG
DETAILS

Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select a tag.

Push the TAG DETAILS button.

- The parameters for that tag is displayed.


5
Use the arrow buttons to select the parameter you wish to
change and push enter.
6

Select for instance High-High alarm limit.

Push ENTER.

- The text Enter new limit: will be displayed on the lower left
side of the colour graphics display.
8
Enter a new limit.
9

Push ENTER.
- The display picture is updated and the new value is
transferred to the Distributed Processing Unit.

120

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

The following table explains what the the different parameters for
digital input tags are used for.
Parameter
Name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Tag name

Text

No

Unique code describing a tag

Description

Text

No

Description of a tag

Function

Text

No

Short code describing the function of


the tag

State

Text

No

Input status after time delay

Distributed Processing Unit


number
Channel number

Number

No

Unique number of the node

Number

No

Number of the channel connected

Channel Type

Channel type is the specification of how


the input signal is handled and scaled

Operator Control
Panel alarm
group
Bridge group

Number

No

All tags in the system are divided into


different groups.

Number

No

All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups.

Autolog

Number

Yes

Included in the autolog list

Noonlog

Number

Yes

Included in the noonlog list

Eventlog

Number

Yes

Included in the eventlog list

Offscan

Number

Yes

Included in the offscan log list

Inhibited by tag

Text

No

Tag to inhibit this channel

Access group

Number

Yes

Limited access id. to acknowledge this


alarm

Enable Event on
Open

Yes/No

Yes

Enable/ disable event

Enable Event on
Closed

Yes/No

Yes

Enable/ disable event

Inhibit On Delay

Number

Yes

Inhibit delay in 1 second

Inhibit Off Delay

Number

Yes

Inhibit delay in 1 second

Alarm On Delay

Number

Yes

Delay in 1 second

Alarm Off Delay

Number

Yes

Delay in 1 second

Signal Cond. On
Delay

Number

Yes

Delay of signal before handled by alarm


system in 1 second

Signal Cond Off


Delay

Number

Yes

Delay of signal before handled by alarm


system in 1 second

Signal Cond Invert

Yes/No

Yes

Invert input status

Table 3 Digital input channel parameters.

3.2.49 How to change the Autolog


The Autolog function is used to print logs a set intervals.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

121

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Altering autolog printing time


AUTO
LOG
CONFIG.

Push the AUTO LOG CONFIG. button.

Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to highlight the time,

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter new time hh.mm: is displayed in the
lower left of the display.

Type in the new time.

Push ENTER.
- The colour graphics display is updated with the new time.
M/S EAGLE
KALDNES
AUTO LOG

NORCONTROL AUTOMATION A/S


HULL NO: 10
93--12--27 12:16:58

Tagname

Tag description

Func Value

AE001
AE002
FO001
FO001
LO001
LO001
ME001
ME002
ME003
ME004
ME005

STARTING AIR
CHARGE AIR
F.O. PRESS
F.O. TEMP
L.O. PRESS
L.O. TEMP
STARTING AIR
CYL.1 LUBRICATION
CYL.2 LUBRICATION
CYL.3 LUBRICATION
CYL.4 LUBRICATION

LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP

Eng.unit Alarm

24.5 KG/CM2
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

DC2000
PAGE 1
Low Lim. High lim.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(

18.00,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,

)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

Table 4 Typical example of an Auto log.


Deleting an autolog printing time
AUTO
LOG
CONFIG.

Push the AUTO LOG CONFIG button.

Use the arrow buttons to highlight the start time to be


deleted.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter new time hh.mm: is displayed in the
lower left of the display.

Push the SPACE button and then ENTER.


- The selected start time is deleted.

122

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Starting and stopping Autolog


AUTO
LOG
CONFIG.

Push the AUTO LOG CONFIG button.

Use the arrow buttons to highlight Autolog on/off.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Autolog on/off (1-on, 0-off) is displayed in the
lower left of the display.

A prompt will occur at the bottom left of the screen: on=1


off=0.

Type in 1.

Push ENTER to turn autolog on, or type in 0 and push


ENTER to turn autolog off.

3.2.50 How to change Deviation


parameters
How to change limits

This function is used to set limits for alarm blocking and deviation
from corrected value such as used for main engine exhaust gas
temperature.
DEVIATION
PARAM.
CONFIG.

Push the DEVIATION PARAM. CONFIG. button.

Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to highlight the


parameter you want to change, for instance the limit for
alarm blocking.

Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter new value: is displayed in the lower left
of the display.

Type in the new value.

Push ENTER.
- The new value is displayed.
- Use this procedure to change any value on this display.

Note

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

When the average temperature is below a preset value, the


deviation alarm is blocked.

123

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Figure 50 Typical Deviation parameter configuration display,


your display may differ.
How to make profile correction

The average cylinder temperature is used as reference for


deviations. For this reason it is necessary to correct the temperature
of each cylinder, to get the same temperature in all cylinders as
reference. This correction is done when running the engine at full
load and can be done in two ways:
Automatic correction
DEVIATION
PARAM.
CONFIG.

Push the DEVIATION PARAM. CONFIG. button.

Use the TRACKBALL and READ button to highlight the


text Auto after Profile correction.

Push ENTER.
- All values found for Current deviation: are moved to
Correction: and Current deviation: should read 0 for
all cylinders.

Manual correction
DEVIATION
PARAM.
CONFIG.

124

Push the DEVIATION PARAM. CONFIG. button.

Use the TRACKBALL and READ button to highlight the


text Man after Profile correction.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Use the TRACKBALL and READ button to highlight the


value for each cylinder after the text Correction. Type in
the value for each cylinder one by one.
- The value for each cylinder under Current deviation:
should read 0.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

For information about Exhaust mean value tag items refer to


page 224.

125

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

3.3

Midi Operator Station


3.3.1

How to handle alarm events

When a process parameter enters an alarm state, the following


takes place:
- The buzzer is activated.
- The alarm is indicated in red at the bottom of the display.
- External alarm devices such as engine room horns are
activated.
- The last unacknowledged alarm is displayed in red at the
bottom of the display.
Do the following:
1

Push to turn any audible alarm off.


- This turns off the buzzer and any external alarm devices.

ACK

Push the ACK button.


- This acknowledges the alarm displayed at the bottom of the
display (the last alarm).
- This alarm text disappears.

ACK

Push the ACK button again to acknowledge the next to last


alarm and so on untill no alarms are unacknowledged.

Attend to the alarm situation.

3.3.2

How to display alarm history

Figure 51 Typical alarm history display.


MENU

126

Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display


pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the
main menu is displayed.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu.

Push 1 to display the Alarm History.

Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through all
alarms a page at a time.

Push Enter to display alarm details.

ENTER

3.3.3

How to display alarm summary

MENU

Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display


pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the
main menu is displayed.

Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu.

Push 2 to display the Alarm Summary.

Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through all
alarms a page at a time.

Push Enter to display alarm details.

ENTER

3.3.4

How to display alarm group


information

MENU

Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display


pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the
main menu is displayed.

Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu.

Push 3 to display the Alarm History.

Use the Navigator key to select an alarm group.

Push Enter.

Use the right and left side of the navigator key to display all
available information for each tag group.

ENTER

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

127

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

ENTER

Push Enter to display alarm details.

3.3.5

How to set the keyboard and


screen configuration

MENU

Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display


pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the
main menu is displayed.

Push 6 to display the Configuration Menu.

Push 2 to display parameters for Keyboard and Screen.

Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select the
item you want to change.

Keyboard light and screen backlight

ENTER

Use the Page down and Page up buttons to set the new
value.

Push Enter.

Keyboard click
ENTER

ENTER

Push Enter.

Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select On


or Off.

Push Enter.

3.3.6

How to change access level

An access control system limits the possibilities to acknowledge


alarms and change system parameters or information. The status
of this system is available as follows:

128

MENU

Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display


pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the
main menu is displayed.

Push 6 to display the Configuration menu.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Push 1 to go to User Access.


- The user access levels are displayed.
* On: Indicates that access at this level is possible.
* Off: Indicates that access at this level is not possible.

Note

Only one user access level can be selected at a time.


The access control system is based on the use of passwords. The
following access levels are available:
- Monitoring: Only for viewing information.
- User: Allows system control through the mimic pictures.
Used to control (start, stop, open, close, etc.) components
you normally dont have access to, such as for instance
operating the power management from the cargo control
room.
- Superuser: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays,
event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. Access
automatically expire after 30 minutes.
- Commissioning: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm
delays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups,
enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for each
Remote Operator Station. Access automatically expire after
30 minutes.

Note

Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allows
unauthorized access to vital system functions.

Note

If you try to make changes without having inserted the right


password the system will automatically request it.

3.3.7

How to display information about


DPUs, tags and tag details

Distributed processing units are often abbreviated DPUs.


MENU

Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display


pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the
main menu is displayed.

Push 2 to display the DPU Overview.

Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through all
DPUs a page at a time.

Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to step through
each DPU one at a time.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

129

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

ENTER

For information about the tags for a particular DPU, select


the DPU and push Enter.

Use the right and left side of the navigator key to display all
available information for each tag.

Tag details view


ENTER

Push Enter to display the parameters for a particular tag Tag Details View.

Figure 52 Tag details display.


Tag menu
MENU

8
9

Push Menu.
The Tag Menu is displayed.
- This menu allows you to display various information about
each tag as follows:

10

Push 1 to display the parameters for this particular tag - Tag


Details View.

11

Push 2 to display a mimic picture for this tag. Use the


function keys to operate the the tag when available.

12

Push 3 to display the Alarm status for this tag (if any).

3.3.8

How to change tag parameters

This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analogue


and digital measuring points.
MENU

130

Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display


pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the
main menu is displayed.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

ENTER

ENTER

Push 2 to display the DPU Overview.

Use the Page down and Page up buttons to select the


distributed processing unit.

Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the
distributed processing unit you want.

Push Enter.

Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to display all
available tags for the distributed processing unit.

Push Enter to display the parameters for the selected tag.

Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the
parameter you want to change.
- Colours are used to indicate if the current access level allows
a parameter to be changed:
* Grey parameter text: Can not be changed at current
access level setting.
* Black parameter text: Parameter can be changed.
If you try to make changes without having inserted the right
password the system will automatically request it.

Note

ENTER

Push Enter.
- A parameter entry window is displayed.

CLR

10

Clear the existing value using the Clr button.

0-9

11

Type in the new value.

Note
ESC

ENTER

12

A red text indicates that you have typed in an illegal


value. If you make an error push Esc to cancel the
input.

Push Enter.
- The new value is inserted. The display picture is updated and
the new value is transferred to the Distributed Processing
Unit and other Remote- and Midi Operator Stations in the
system.

Analogue input tag parameters

The following table explains what the the different parameters for
analogue input tags are used for.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

131

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Parameter
name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Tag name

Text

No

Unique code describing a tag

Tag number

Number

No

Unique number describing a tag

Description

Text

Yes

Description of a tag

Distributed Processing Unit


number
Channel number

Number

No

Unique number of the node

Number

No

Number of the channel connected

Channel Type

132

Channel type is the specification of how


the input signal is handled and scaled

Operator Control
Panel alarm
group
Bridge group

Number

No

All tags in the system are divided into


different groups.

Number

No

All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups.

Autolog

Number

Yes

Included in the autolog list

Noonlog

Number

Yes

Included in the noonlog list

Eventlog

Number

Yes

Included in the eventlog list

Offscan

Number

Yes

Included in the offscan log list

Offscan value

Number

Yes

Included in the offscan log list

Inhibited by tag

Text

No

Tag to inhibit this channel

Access group

Number

Yes

Limited access id. to acknowledge this


alarm

Limit Alarm Low


Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm High

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm High


High

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Event Low


Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event High

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event High


High

Number

Yes

Event limit

Filter Time

Number

Yes

Time in 100 milliseconds

Dynamic Dead
Band

Number

Yes

Report value dead band limit

Counts Low

Number

Yes

A/D minimum value

Counts High

Number

Yes

A/D maximum value

Eng.Units Low

Number

Yes

Instrument minimum value

Eng.Units High

Number

Yes

Instruments maximum value

Alarm On
Delay1

Number

Yes

High/ Low delay in 1 second

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Parameter
name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Alarm Off
Delay1

Number

Yes

High/ Low delay in 1 second

Alarm On
Delay2

Number

Yes

HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second

Alarm Off
Delay2

Number

Yes

HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second

Inhibit On Delay

Number

Yes

Inhibit delay in 1 second

Inhibit Off Delay

Number

Yes

Inhibit delay in 1 second

Table 5 Analogue input channel parameters.


Digital input tag parameters

The following table explains what the the different parameters for
digital input tags are used for.
Parameter
Name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Tag name

Text

No

Unique code describing a tag

Description

Text

No

Description of a tag

Function

Text

No

Short code describing the function of


the tag

State

Text

No

Input status after time delay

Distributed Processing Unit


number
Channel number

Number

No

Unique number of the node

Number

No

Number of the channel connected

Channel Type

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Channel type is the specification of how


the input signal is handled and scaled

Operator Control
Panel alarm
group
Bridge group

Number

No

All tags in the system are divided into


different groups.

Number

No

All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups.

Autolog

Number

Yes

Included in the autolog list

Noonlog

Number

Yes

Included in the noonlog list

Eventlog

Number

Yes

Included in the eventlog list

Offscan

Number

Yes

Included in the offscan log list

Inhibited by tag

Text

No

Tag to inhibit this channel

Access group

Number

Yes

Limited access id. to acknowledge this


alarm

Enable Event on
Open

Yes/No

Yes

Enable/ disable event

Enable Event on
Closed

Yes/No

Yes

Enable/ disable event

Inhibit On Delay

Number

Yes

Inhibit delay in 1 second

133

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Parameter
Name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Inhibit Off Delay

Number

Yes

Inhibit delay in 1 second

Alarm On Delay

Number

Yes

Delay in 1 second

Alarm Off Delay

Number

Yes

Delay in 1 second

Signal Cond. On
Delay

Number

Yes

Delay of signal before handled by alarm


system in 1 second

Signal Cond Off


Delay

Number

Yes

Delay of signal before handled by alarm


system in 1 second

Signal Cond Invert

Yes/No

Yes

Invert input status

Table 6 Digital input channel parameters.

3.3.9

How to change alarm limits

Refer to page 130 How to change parameters.

3.3.10 How to change alarm delay

134

Refer to page 130 How to change parameters.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

3.4

Local Operator Station


3.4.1

Note

How to view alarms

The following is only relevant when the Local Operator Station is


sett up as a local alarm system.
When an alarm occurs, the appointed Local Operator Station will
display the alarm message, sound the buzzer and activate the horn.
The display will look like this:

Alarm!
|View|

|Ignore|

Figure 53 Alarm display.


1

To silence the buzzer and horn, push SOUND OFF.

To go back to what was previously displayed on the Local


Operator Station push F4 (Ignore).

To view the new alarm push F1 (View), this will take you to
the top of the alarm history.

3.4.2

How to acknowledge alarms

- Unacknowledged alarms have an* in front of the alarm


message.
1

In the Alarm History, Alarm Summary and Alarm Details an


unacknowledged alarm event or tag can be acknowledged by
selecting it and pushing ACK.

The state will change from unacknowledged to


acknowledged or back to normal if the alarm condition is no
longer present.

3.4.3
1

How to turn the sound off

To silence the buzzer and horn push SOUND OFF.

3.4.4

How to display and interpret alarm


history

The Alarm history can be reached in two ways:

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

135

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

When the alarm display is shown push F1.

Select Alarm History from the top menu.

Push ENTER.
Wed May 12 10:01:51 2001
>*12 09:58:22 ME0010
*12.09:57:03 LO0034
12.09:40:21 Fo0044

ALARM HISTORY
Alm IFH
Alm Low
Alm High

Figure 54 Typical alarm history display.


- All Local Operator Stations that can connect to a
Distributed Process Unit can view its alarm history and
acknowledge alarms.
- The alarm history is a list of the last 40 alarms for a specific
Distributed Processing Unit. Alarms are sorted by time, the
last alarm event at the top.
- Line 1 of alarm history display shows current time and the
text ALARM HISTORY. The following lines display alarm
events.
- The > symbol indicates that the alarm is selected.
4

Use SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN to move up and


down in the list.

The DEFAULT button moves you to the top of the list.


- Each alarm event line shows the following data:

>*12 09:58:22 ME0010

Alm IFH

Tag name

Alarm state
* = Unacknowledged
. = Acknowledged
= Normal

Time of alarm
event
Day of month,
hours : minutes :
seconds

Event
Alm = Alarm
Ret = Return
= No even

Alarm event type


If no event for this
tag the highest
alarm state is
displayed.

Figure 55 Alarm event interpretation.

136

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

An unacknowledged alarm, in focus, can be acknowledged


by pushing the ACK button.

Push MENU DOWN or ENTER to display alarm details.

3.4.5

How to display and interpret alarm


details

Alarm details is used to provide more information about an alarm.


1

Select Alarm History as described above.

Push ENTER.

Select the alarm you want Alarm Details for using


SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN.

Push ENTER.

Wed May 12 10:01:51 2001


>*12 09:58:22 ME0010
MAIN ENGINE BEARING TEMP
511.2 DEG.C
IFH

ALARM HISTORY
Alm IFH

Figure 56 Alarm details display.


5

An unacknowledged alarm is acknowledged by pushing


ACK.

SELECT UP, SELECT DOWN and DEFAULT buttons


can be used to move up and down in the list.
- If the alarm conditions has returned to normal the field is left
blank.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Push MENU UP to return to Alarm History.

137

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Alarm state
* = Unacknowledged
. = Acknowledged
= Normal

Time of day
Day of month,
hours : minutes :
seconds

Event
Alm = Alarm
Ret = Return
= No even

Alarm event type


If no event for this
tag the highest
alarm state is
displayed

Tag name

*12 09:58:22 ME0010


Alm IFH
MAIN ENGINE BEARING TEMP
511.7 DEG.C
IFH

TAG
DESCRIPTION

CURRENT
VALUE

ENGINEERING
UNIT

HIGHEST ALARM
STATE PRESENT

Figure 57 Alarm details interpretation.

3.4.6
1

How to display alarm summary

From the top menu select Alarm Summary and push


ENTER.
- All Local Operator Stations that can connect to a Distributed
Process Unit can view Alarm Summary and acknowledge
alarms.
- Alarm summary is a list of the last alarms or
unacknowledged states. If the event have returned to normal
the tag data is still displayed and the alarm field will contain
the highest alarm present.
Wed May 12 10:01:51 2001
>*12 09:58:22 ME0010
*12.09:57:03 LO0034
12.09:40:21 Fo0044

ALARM SUMMARY
Alm IFH
Alm Low
Alm High

Figure 58 Alarm summary display.

138

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

3.5

Watch calling system


3.5.1

How to receive a call

- When you receive a call one of the watch location buttons are
flashing.
1

Push SOUND OFF to acknowledge the call.

Figure 59 Buttons used to receive a call. Button texts will vary.

3.5.2

How to respond to alarms

When an alarm condition occur, the buzzer will sound and the
alarm will be indicated on the Watch Bridge Unit. Do the
following:
1

Push SOUND OFF.

Read the alarm information on the display or the text next to


the indicator. The ON DUTY engineer should also receive
the alarm indicator and take appropriate action.

After a time check that the alarm is no longer displayed on


the Watch Bridge Unit after the alarm condition is corrected.

3.5.3
1

How to call the ON DUTY engineer

Push the CALL XXX (button texts will vary) button to


notify the ON DUTY engineer to contact the bridge.
- The LED indicator will flash until the ON DUTY engineer
has acknowledged the call. Then it will be steady lit.

To terminated the call push the button again.


Figure 60 Buttons used to call on duty engineer. Button texts
will vary.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

139

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

3.5.4
1

How to transfer watch


responsibility

Push WATCH RESPONSIBILITY to notify the other


locations to accept the transfer of the watch responsibility.
- The LED indicator will flash until the transfer is
acknowledged. When the indicator is steady lit watch
responsibility has been transferred.

Figure 61 Buttons used to transfer watch responsibility. Button


texts may vary.

3.5.5

How to accept watch responsibility

- When the indicator for your location begins to flash,

3.6

Push the button for your watch location.

This acknowledges and accepts the transfer of watch


responsibility to you.

Watch Bridge Unit

3.6.1

How to display alarm information


when in off duty mode

- In Off Duty mode, all Watch Bridge Units can be defined as


either active or passive This is done as part of the
configuration in one of the Remote Operator Stations.

140

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Off Duty ACTIVE

- The panel will not sound alarms but all LED indicators and
the display will show alarm conditions.
Off Duty PASSIVE

- The panel will not sound alarms.


- LCD-type panels will display date and time information
only. Pushing the controls on a LCD panel will display the
alarms.
- The LEDs on the alarm group-type panels will remain dark.

Figure 62 Watch Bridge Unit controls.

3.7

Watch Cabin Unit


3.7.1

How to display alarm information


when duty mode

- In Off Duty mode, all Watch Cabin Units can be defined as


either active or passive This is done as part of the
configuration in one of the Remote Operator Stations.
Off Duty ACTIVE

- The panel will not sound alarms but all LED indicators and
the display will show alarm conditions.
Off Duty PASSIVE

- The panel will not sound alarms.


- LCD-type panels will display date and time information
only. Pushing the controls on a LCD panel will display the
alarms.
- The LEDs on the alarm group-type panels will remain dark.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

141

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

3.8

Using ShipViewer
3.8.1

Main ShipViewer functions

ShipViewer has the following main functions:


Counter display
Alarm displays
DPU displays
Deviation displays
Alarm group displays
Alarm summery displays
Alarm history displays
Selected points display
Selected trend display
Selected bargraph display
Mimic diagrams as found in the Remote Operator Station

3.8.2

Understanding the ShipViewer


display

Overview

All ShipViewer functions are available through the menus bar and
the most frequently used functions are also directly available
through the toolbar buttons. These are further described in the
following.
Menu bar
Toolbar buttons

Figure 63 ShipViewer menu and tool bar.


Toolbar buttons

Print screen
Save image to disk
Print preview
Open image file

142

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Display version and build information


Previous window
Next window , for when you have used previous window
Alarm summary display.
Alarm history display
Alarm group display.
Running hours display.
DPU display.
Deviation display.
Colour codes for data displays

The channel data is colour coded as follows:


- Green: The channel is in a normal state.
-

Yellow: The channel is in an alarm state and acknowledged.

- Red: The channel is in an alarm state and not acknowledged.


- Cyan: The channel is in a high priority alarm state.
- Blue: The channel is inhibited.
- Grey: Not updated or invalid values.
The background colour can be set to either dark blue or white. Dark
blue is better to view some coloured texts, while white is better for
printing.
1

In the menu bar select Settings and either select or clear No


background color.

3.8.3

Explanation to the displays

Alarm summary display

The alarm summery display shows currently active alarm entries.


Alarms acknowledged and returned to normal state are not
displayed. The information is instantly updated as soon as
something happens. Alarms are sorted by date and time.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

143

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Alarm group display

The alarm group display shows all measuring points in the


predefined alarm groups. These group where defined during
commissioning of the DataChief C20. When selecting the alarm
group display, a dialog containing all alarm groups appear on the
screen. In this dialog all alarm groups with active alarms are
indicated by a red dot.
.

Select an alarm group by pushing its button

To go between alarm group view and group view push the


Alarm Display/Group Display button (at the bottom)
repeatedly.
- The alarm and group displays are sorted by tag name.

Alarm history display

The alarm history display shows both active and alarms returned
to normal.
1

Scroll through the pages using the Page Up and Page Down
buttons on the keyboard.
- The information is instantly updated as soon as something
happens. Alarms are sorted by date and time.

Counter display

The counter display shows counters and lap counters for such
components as pumps, generators, engines, etc. included in
counter system on DataChief C20.
Distributed Processing Unit display

The Distributed Processing Unit (DPU) display shows all


measuring points connected to each DPU.
1

Scroll through all units using the Page Up and Page Down
buttons on the keyboard.

Deviation display

The deviation display shows exhaust deviation data for all engines
having deviation calculations in the DataChief C20.
1

144

Scroll through all units using the Page Up and Page Down
buttons on the keyboard.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Selected points display

The selected points display shows one of up to five groups


containing customer selected tags. Each display can include up to
20 tags.
Note

More than one window may be open simultaneously. These may be


cascaded or tiled when required (See the Windows drop down
menu). However when you want to configure a new display all
other windows must be closed!
Display existing tag selection

In the Displays drop down menu select Selected points


display.

Select one of the five groups and push OK.


- The selected points display is shown.

Make or alter tag selection

In the Displays drop down menu select Selected points


display.

Select one of the five groups and push OK.

- The selected points display is shown.


3
Push the Config button.
- The Selected Points Configuration dialog is displayed.
4
Use the Select pull down menu to select system.
5

Select tags and push Add.

- The selected points display can be selected from any of the


different systems available. Select up to twenty tags.
6
Push OK.
Selected trend display

The selected trends display shows one of up to five groups


containing customer selected tags. Each display can include up to
eight tags.
Note

More than one window may be open simultaneously. These may be


cascaded or tiled when required (See the Windows drop down
menu). However when you want to configure a new display all
other windows must be closed!
Display existing tag selection

In the Displays drop down menu select Selected trend


display.

Select one of the five groups and push OK.


- The selected trend display is shown.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

145

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Push the Time button to select trend sample time.

Push Stop to halt sampling and Start to restart it again.

Select Grid to display a grid in the sampling window.

Make or alter tag selection

In the Displays drop down menu select Selected trend


display.

Select one of the five groups and push OK.

- The selected trend display is shown.


3
Push the Config button.
- The Selected Points Configuration dialog is displayed.
4
Select a system under Select.
5

Select tags and push Add.

- The selected trend display can be selected from any of the


different systems available. Select up to eight tags.
6
Push OK.
7

Push the Time button to select trend sample time.

Push Stop to halt sampling and Start to restart it again.

Select Grid to display a grid in the sampling window.

Selected bargraph display

The selected bargraph display shows one of up to five bargraph


display pages containing customer selected tags. Each display can
include up to twelve tags.
Note

More than one window may be open simultaneously. These may be


cascaded or tiled when required (See the Windows drop down
menu). However when you want to configure a new display all
other windows must be closed!
Display existing tag selection

In the Displays drop down menu select Selected bargraph


display.

Select one of the five groups and push OK.


- The selected bargraph display is shown.

Make or alter tag selection

In the Displays drop down menu select Selected bargraph


display.

Select one of the five groups and push OK.


- The selected bargraph display is shown.

146

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Push the Config button.


- The Selected Points Configuration dialog is displayed.

Use the Select pull down menu to select system.

Select tags and push Add.


- The selected points display can be selected from any of the
different systems available. Select up to twelve tags.

Push OK.

Mimic diagrams

All mimic diagrams found in the Remote Operator Station are


available through the ShipViewer. The number and design of these
mimic diagrams are ship dependent.
1

Push the Mimics button on menu bar.

Select mimic diagrams from the drop down list.

Figure 64 ShipViewer mimic selection.

3.8.4

How to print displayed information

Use the following procedure to print the information seen on the


colour graphics display.
1

Select the No background color is in the Settings menu.


- This reduces the amount of ink used when printing.

Figure 65 ShipViewer Settings menu.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

147

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Push the print icon in the tool bar.

3.8.5

How to save ShipViewer images

Use the following procedure to save the image seen on the colour
graphics display.
1

Push the save icon in the tool bar.


- A standard file save dialog is displayed.

Enter filename and a location and push Save.


- Use any program for handling pictures or bit maps to view
the file.

Figure 66 ShipViewer Save dialog.

3.8.6

How to view saved mimic diagram


files

Use the following procedure to view previously saved image.


1

Push the open icon in the tool bar.


- A standard file open dialog is displayed.

Select filename and a location and push Open.


- The file will be displayed using Paint - a Microsoft program
for viewing, editing or creating bitmap images.

148

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring system

Figure 67 Typical open file window.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

149

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

4 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM


4.1

Introduction
This chapter teaches you how to use the process control system of
the DataChief C20. It is intended for personnel familiar with the
Getting Started and Alarm and Monitoring sections of this
manual. The following subjects are covered:
- Remote Operator Station process control
- Local Operator Station process control

4.2

About the process control system


The following describes the DataChief C20 process control
system. It can control the following types of equipment:
Pumps
Fans
Compressors
Valves
It includes:
PID controllers

150

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

4.3

Remote Operator Station


4.3.1

How to operate a pump starter

Pump starter functions

To control pumps the following functions and features are


available:
Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different
directions.
Alarm reporting for start and stop failure.
Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded.
Auto & manual control.
Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout.
Blocking from operation when Local switch is active or during
blackout.
Automatic shut down.
Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowing
the system to record time of starting, running and stopping.
Pump starter types

The following types of pumps can be operated:


Single speed: One speed control in one direction.
Two speed: Two speed in the same direction.
Two directional: One speed in two directions.
All speed: Two speed in two directions.
Single acting: One speed with steady relay control.
Pump symbols

Different pump symbols are used to indicate different types of


pumps.
Figure 68 One way, one speed pump.
Figure 69 One way, two speed pump at low speed.
Figure 70 One way, two speed pump at high speed.
Figure 71 Two way, one speed pump going forward.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

151

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Figure 72 Two way, one speed pump going in reverse.


Figure 73 Two way, two speed pump going forward at low
speed.
Figure 74 Two way, two speed pump going forward at high
speed.
Figure 75 Two way, two speed pump going in reverse at low
speed.
Figure 76 Two way, two speed pump going in reverse at high
speed.
Pump symbol colours

Pump symbols have colours according to the state they are in:
Arrow outline colour

- Green: Running
- Grey: Stopped
Arrow fill colour

For two-speed pumps only:


- Arrow fill green: Full speed
- Arrow outline green: Low speed
Circle colour

Green: Running and remote


Grey: Stopped and remote
Blue: Blocked
Red: Alarm
White: Local - not ready
Yellow: Standby

Parameters

Timeout: Time out for start and stop commands.


Wait change direction: Wait time when changing speed direction.
Pulse on: Pulse duration for start and stop commands.
Blackout restart time: The time the equipment is blocked from
auto restarting after a blackout.

152

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

Stopped time: Stand still time when changing speed with stop
pulse
Alarm and event enable

Parameters for enabling and disabling alarms and events are


available. Some alarms must be enabled at all times due to
classification society requirements. Start fail and trip alarms are
among these. The following conditions will result in alarms, and
the starter will be set to manual:
Trip
Start failure
Stop failure
Started without commanded
Modes

The starter can be operated in two different modes; auto and


manual.
- Auto: A unit can be automatically started and stopped.
- Manual: Only manual start and stop is possible.
Restart after blackout applies to both auto and manual modes. The
function is activated when the timer is set to a value larger than
zero, and the blackout detector is referred to by the tag reference.
The shut down and start block functions are active both in auto and
manual modes.
Single acting control

A relay is used to start and stop the controlled unit. The relay is
closed as long as the unit is meant to be running, and opened when
the unit is meant to be stopped. This functionality applies to one
way, one speed units only.
If the the controlled unit does not include a sensor to know if it it
running, the starter will generate the feedback signal internally. In
this way, the event information sent from the starter includes the
current running information.
Blackout

Some equipment starters (provided by some manufacturers) have


the local/remote switch connected serially with the power failure
switch. On a blackout, the starter will lose the remote signal. It is
important that the starter detects the blackout before it is set to
local, and that the remote signal is back before the starter receives
recover from blackout. To solve this set the delay to off at the
running and remote feedback, and the delay to on for the system
blackout signal.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

153

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Actual blackout
System blackout
Running feedback
Remote feedback

Recover

Figure 77 Blackout sequence as described above.


How to start one way one speed pumps

Select the mimic display showing the pump.

Move the cursor over the pump you want to start.

Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.

Push ACTIVATE/START
- The pump symbol turns green.
- The pump status changes to Running.

How to stop one way one speed pumps

Select the mimic display showing the pump.

Move the cursor over the pump you want to stop.

Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.

Push DEACTIVATE/STOP.
- The pump symbol turns grey.
- The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL,.

How to operate two way and to speed pumps

Select the mimic display showing the pump.

Move the cursor over the pump you want to operate.

Push READ.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.
- Dependent on the pump type one of the following windows
is displayed:

154

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

Figure 78 Menu for two speed pump

Figure 79 Menu for two way pump

Figure 80 Menu for two speed, two way pump. Actual


text may differ.
To start and stop

Move the cursor over the Start or Stop button.

Push READ.
- The valve symbol changes colour to green for start, or grey
for stop.

To change speed or direction

Note

Move the cursor over the corresponding option button.

Push READ.

Move the cursor over the Start button.

Push READ.

When changing direction the pump will stop, and start in the
reverse direction after a delay. The delay is configurable.
How to reset pumps

The pump logic must be reset when the pump has tripped or as the
result of a start failure.
ALARM
ACK

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Push Alarm Ack to acknowledge the alarm

Correct the problem.

Select the mimic display showing the pump.

155

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Move the cursor to the symbol for the pump you want to
reset.

Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.

RESET

Push RESET.
- The circle around the pump symbol changes from red to
grey.

Standby pump systems

A standby system includes a pump symbol for each standby pump.


The priority number defines which pump will start first - lowest
number first. The running pump need not have the lowest number.
When two pumps have the same standby number, both will start
simultaneously. If no pump is running, the pump with the lowest
number will start at group start.
AUTO

Auto or manual modes


Pump symbol

AUTO (1)
Pressure indicator

STANDBY (2)
Priority

Figure 81 Symbol for standby pump system.


Standby system auto and manual modes

The standby system can be set to one of two modes:


- Auto: For normal standby system operation from the
Remote Operator Station.
- Manual: The standby pump system is disabled. Pumps can
be manually operated.

AUTO

Select the mimic display showing the standby pumps.

Move the cursor over the standby pumps controller symbol.

Push READ.
- The standby pump controller is selected.
- The text background starts flashing.

156

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

AUTO
MAN

Push Auto/man.
- The controller changes between auto and manual. The text
background changes between green and grey.
* Green - auto
* Grey - manual

How to start a standby pump system

To operate a pump system i standby mode the pump controller and


each of the pumps must be set to auto. Then one of the pumps must
be started.

MANUAL

Select the mimic display showing the standby pumps.

Move the cursor over the standby pumps controller symbol.

Push READ.
- The standby pump controller is selected.
- The text background starts flashing.

AUTO
MAN

Push Auto/man.
- The text background turns green and the text changes to
Auto.

AUTO

Move the cursor over each of the pumps in the pump system.

Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.

AUTO
MAN

Push Auto/man.

- The pump status changes to auto.


8
When all pumps are set to auto, move the cursor over the
pump you want to start.
9

Push ACTIVATE/START
- The pump symbol turns green.
- The pump status changes to Running, auto.

How to stop a standby pump system

To take a pump system out of standby mode set the pump controller
to manual and stop the running pump if required.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

157

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

AUTO

Select the mimic display showing the standby pumps.

Move the cursor over the standby pumps controller symbol.

Push READ.
- The standby pump controller is selected.
- The text background starts flashing.

AUTO
MAN

Push Auto/man.
- The text background turns grey.
- The controller is set to manual.

MANUAL

If you want to stop the running pump, move the cursor over
it.

Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.

Push DEACTIVATE/STOP
- The pump symbol turns grey.
- The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL.,
manual.

How to take a pump out of the standby system

To take a pump out of the standby system set the pumps to manual.
1

Select the mimic display showing the standby pumps.

Move the cursor over the pump.

Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.

AUTO
MAN

Push Auto/man.
- The pump status changes to manual.

If you need to stop the pump, push DEACTIVATE/STOP


- The pump symbol turns grey.
- The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL.,
manual.

158

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

How to put a pump back into the standby system

To put a pump into the standby system set the pumps to auto.
1

Select the mimic display showing the standby pumps.

Move the cursor over the pump.

Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.

AUTO
MAN

Push Auto/man.
- The pump status changes to auto.

How to handle a failure to a running pump

When a pump fails it is detected through a drop in pressure.


- The pressure indicator turns yellow indicating a drop in
pressure.
- The 1.st standby pump starts.
- The failing pump goes to manual. It will keep on running or
stop dependent on how the system is configured.
ALARM
ACK

Push Alarm Ack to acknowledge the alarm.

Correct the problem.

How to set standby priority

A standby pump system will normally consist of two or three


pumps.
1

Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as master.

Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.

3
MASTER

Push Master.
- The text changes to standby (1).

Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as first
standby.

Push READ.
- The pump is selected. The circle around the pump starts
flashing.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

159

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

1.ST
STAND
BY

Push 1.st standby.


- The text changes to standby (2).

Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as next
standby.

Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.

NEXT
STAND
BY

Push Next standby.


- The text changes to standby (3).

4.3.2

How to operate a fan starter

Fan starter functions

To control fans the following functions and features are available:


Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different
directions.
Alarm reporting for start and stop failure.
Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded.
Auto & manual control.
Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout.
Blocking from operation when Local switch or blackout.
Automatic shut down.
Optional time stamp on every change of operation, allowing the
system to record time of starting, running and stopping.
Fan starter types

The following types of starters can be operated:


Single speed: One speed control in one direction.
Two speed: Two speed in one direction.
Two directional: One speed in two directions.
All speed: Two speed in two directions.
Single acting: One speed with steady relay control.
Fan symbols

Different fan symbols are used to indicate different types of fans.

160

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

Figure 82 One way, one speed fan.


Figure 83 One way, two speed fan at low speed.
Figure 84 One way, two speed fan at high speed.
Figure 85 Two way, one speed fan going forward.
Figure 86 Two way, one speed fan going in reverse.
Figure 87 Two way, two speed fan going forward at low speed.
Figure 88 Two way, two speed fan going forward at high speed.
Figure 89 Two way, two speed fan going in reverse at low
speed.
Figure 90 Two way, two speed fan going in reverse at high
speed.
Fan symbol colours
Arrow outline colour

- Green: Running
- Grey: Stopped
Arrow fill colour

For two-speed fans only!


- Shape filled green: Full speed
- Shape outline green: Low speed
Circle colour

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Green: Running and remote


Grey: Stopped and remote
Blue: Blocked
Red: Alarm
White: Local - not ready
Yellow: Standby

161

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

How to start a fan

1
2

Select the mimic display showing the fan.


Move the cursor over the fan.

Push READ.
- The fan is selected.
- The circle around the fan starts flashing.

Push ACTIVATE/START
- The fan symbol turns green.

How to stop a fan

1
2

Select the mimic display showing the fan.


Move the cursor over the fan.

Push READ.
- The fan is selected.
- The circle around the fan starts flashing.

Push DEACTIVATE/STOP
- The fan symbol turns grey.

How to reset a fan

The fan logic must be reset when a fan has tripped or as the result
of a start failure.
ALARM
ACK

RESET

1
2
3
4

Push Alarm Ack to acknowledge the alarm.


Correct the problem, if any.
Select the mimic display showing the fan.
Move the cursor to the symbol for the fan you want to reset.

Push READ.
- The fan is selected. The circle around the fan starts flashing.

Push RESET.
- The circle around the fan symbol changes from red to grey.

4.3.3

How to operate a compressor

The main purpose of the compressor starter is to control the


compressors in a compressed air system. The compressor starter
provides automatic start on low pressure and stop on high pressure.
The compressed air system may include one or more compressors
with analogue or binary pressure sensors. The figure describes a
compressor system with one common analogue pressure signal.

162

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

LEADER

FOLLOVER

AIR RESERVOIR

Figure 91 A 2-compressor system with common pressure


sensor.
The compressor starter monitors pressure and running signals.
Compressors are started if the pressure is lower than the set limit
and stopped if it is higher. The following functions are handled:
Compressor starter functions

To control compressor the following functions and features are


available:
Alarm reporting for start and stop failure.
Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded.
Auto & manual control.
Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout.
Blocking from operation when Local switch is active or during
blackout.
Automatic shut down.
Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowing
the system to record time of starting, running and stopping.
Compressor control types

Analogue pressure 1: One analogue pressure.


Analogue pressure 2: Two analogue pressures.
Binary pressure with hysteresis: Pressure switches with built
in hysteresis.
Binary pressure without hysteresis: Separate pressure
switches for start and stop.
Compressor symbols

Compressors have the following symbol.


Figure 92 Compressor symbol.
Compressor symbol colours

Compressor symbols have colours according to the state they are


in.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

163

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Arrow colour

- Green: Running
- Grey: Stopped
Circle colour

Green: Running and remote


Grey: Stopped and remote
Blue: Blocked
Red: Alarm
White: Local - not ready
Yellow: Standby

Leader follower compressor system

A leader follower compressor system includes a symbol for each


compressor. The symbol is described above.
AUTO

Auto or manual modes


Compressor symbol

LEADER

FOLLOVER

Figure 93 Leader follower compressor system.


Priorities

For automatic operation, the compressor starter must be set to auto


mode. The compressor starter assigns different start and stop
priorities as follows:
Leader
1.st follower
2.nd follower
3.rd follower
A compressor can only have one priority at a time. The priority
defines in which order the compressors will start and stop. The start
setting for the 1.st follower must be lower or equal to the leader
start setting and the stop setting for the first follower must be lower
or equal to the leader stop setting. All followers are stopped when
the leader stop setting is reached. For systems with analogue
pressure sensors all followers are stopped when reaching the alarm
high high limit.

164

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

Pressure tags

Command timeout: The time the starter will wait before


signalling command timeout.
Pressure filter: The length of time the pressure may stay below the
start limit before the compressor is started.
Wait pressure at start: When a compressor is starting, a new
compressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above the
start limit when this timer has expired.
Blackout recover: The time the compressors are blocked from
auto restarting after a blackout.
Start/stop conditions

Start and stop conditions are adjustable by changing parameters.


Start

Systems using both binary and analogue pressure sensors have


separate start settings for each priority. Start conditions are:
Pressure lower than the start limit.
When a compressor is starting, a new compressor is started if
the pressure has not increased to above the start limit when a set
time has expired.
Stop

The stop limit can be the same for all compressors, or individual.
When analogue pressure sensors are used, each priority has
separate stop settings. When binary pressure sensors are used,
separate sensors can be used to define the stop limit for each
priority. A common stop sensor can also be used. All priorities are
stopped by the stop leader setting. Stop conditions are:
Pressure higher than the stop limit.
Stop leader signal is active.
High-high pressure.
Auto

Two modes exist, auto and manual. Select auto mode to set the
compressor automation functionality in operation. Auto mode
operation requires that the starter is not blocked, or in any way
disabled from operating.
The following gives different examples for start and stop
condition:
Leader control

The leader compressor has its own start and stop limits.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

165

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

pressure
Stop leader

Start leader
time

Figure 94 Leader start stop limits.


Start follower on pressure drop

Each priority has its own start and stop settings. A compressor set
to a priority will start when the pressure lowers below its start
setting, and stop when the pressure rises above its stop setting.
pressure
Stop leader
Stop first follower
Start leader
Start first follower

time
Stop first follower & leader

Start leader & first follower

Figure 95 Start 1.st follower on pressure setting.


pressure
Common stop setting
Start leader
Start first follower
Start second follower

time
Start leader & two followers

Stop compressors

Figure 96 Start two followers on pressure setting.


Start follower after a time delay

The 1.st follower can start on its own pressure setting, or a time
delay after a start condition for the leader compressor. The 2.nd and
3.rd followers will start in similar ways. There is no delayed start
on the start conditions for the topping up compressor.
pressure
start leader
start delay = T4
time
Start leader

Start follower on timer

Figure 97 Start follower after a time delay - principle diagram.

166

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

In the illustration below, the third follower will start after a time
delay. The timer is started when the 2.nd follower meets its start
conditions. If the pressure falls below third followers start
conditions before the timer has expired, the third follower will start
immediately.
pressure
Stop leader
Stop first follower
Stop second follower
Stop second follower
Start leader

Start delay

Start first follower


Start second follower
Start third follower

time

Start leader & two followers

Start third follower

Stop followers & leader

Figure 98 Start followers after a time delay.


The followers are started on timer. The timer is started when the
leader has start conditions. If the first and second compressor does
not start on their own start settings, the third follower is started 3
times; start delay after the leader had its start condition.
Stop leader
Stop first follower

pressure

dT = Start delay

Stop second follower


Stop third follower

Start timer third follower = 3dT

Start leader

2dT
Start first follower
dT
Start second follower
Start third follower
Start leader & two followers
Start first follower

time
Start third follower

stop

Figure 99 Follower start timers.


In the illustration below, the followers are started after time delays.
The delay starts when the leader meets its start conditions. If the
first follower meets it own start condition (before the delay has
expired), the second and third followers will reset their timers, and
count the time from this event.
pressure

dT = Start delay

Common stop setting


Start third timer = 3dT (interrupted)
Start third timer = 2dT

Start leader
Start first follower
Start second follower

Start 2.nd timer = 2dT (int.)

Start third follower

Start 2.nd = dT
dT
Start leader

time
Start first

Start second

Start third

stop

Figure 100 Interrupted start timer


Built in hysteresis

This function operates using two pressure switches:

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

167

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

The leader will start and stop based on the high pressure switch.
The follower will start and stop in correspondence with the state
of the low pressure switch.
pressure
high
low
time
start
leader

start
follower

stop
start
follower

stop
follower

stop
leader

Figure 101 Built in hysteresis.


By adjusting the pressure switches differently, the two
compressors will function as a pair where one starts before the
other.
Two analogue pressures

In two reservoir systems the compressors are started when one the
pressure sensors indicate below the start limit. The compressors
are stopped when both of the pressure sensors increase above the
stop limit.
pressure

stop leader

start leader
Start leader

Stop leader

Start leader

Figure 102 Two analogue pressures


Overhaul function

Two reservoir system have an overhaul function. That is when one


of the reservoirs is disabled from being part of the auto start and
stop logic. There are two ways of setting a reservoir to overhaul:
Set the pressure sensors belonging to the reservoir to off scan.
The sensor is not included when checking the auto start and stop
limits for the compressors.
Set a button in the mimic or physical switch on the equipment
to out of service. Different configurations are available as
required by the customer.

168

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

How to set auto and manual modes

A leader follower compressor system can be set to one of two


modes:
- Auto: For normal leader follower system operation from the
Remote Operator Station.
- Manual: The leader follower system can only be operated
locally from the starter cabinet.
1
Select the mimic display showing the leader follower
compressor system.
AUTO

Move the cursor over the leader follower compressor


auto/manual square where you want to change mode.

Push READ.
- The compressor controller is selected. The text background
starts flashing.

AUTO
MAN

Push Auto/man.
- The controller changes between auto and manual. The text
background changes between green and grey.
* Green - auto
* Grey - manual

How to start a leader follower compressor system

To operate a leader follower compressor system in standby mode


the compressor controller and each of the compressors must be set
to auto. Then one of the compressors must be started.
Note

When the pressure is higher than the stop limit, the compressor will
not start.

MANUAL

Select the mimic display showing the leader follower


compressor system.

Move the cursor over the auto/manual controller symbol.

Push READ.
- The controller is selected.
- The text background starts flashing.

AUTO
MAN

AUTO

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Push Auto/man
- The text background turns green and the text changes to
auto.

169

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

AUTO
MAN

Move the cursor over each of the compressors in the leader


follower system..
Push READ.
- The compressor is selected.
- The circle around the compressor starts flashing.

Push Auto/man.
- The compressor status changes to auto.
8
Do this for each of the compressors.
9
When all compressors are set to auto, move the cursor to the
compressor you want to start.
10

Push READ.
- The compressor is selected.
- The circle around the compressor starts flashing.

11
12

Push ACTIVATE/START to to start the compressor.


Push Auto/man.
- The button status changes to Running, remote CTRL., auto.

How to stop a leader follower compressor system

To take a leader follower pump system out of standby mode, set the
compressor controller to manual and stop the running compressor
if required.
1
Select the mimic display showing the leader follower
compressor system.
AUTO

2
3

AUTO
MAN

MANUAL

Push READ.
- The controller is selected.
- The text background starts flashing.
Push Auto/man.

- The controller is set to manual.


5
If you want to stop the running compressor, move the cursor
over it.
6

170

Move the cursor over the controller symbol

Push READ.
- The compressor is selected.
- The circle around the compressor starts flashing.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

Push DEACTIVATE/STOP
- The compressor symbol turns grey.
- The compressor status changes to Ready to start, remote
CTRL., manual.

How to set leader follower priority

A standby compressor system will normally consist of two or three


compressors.
1

Select the mimic display showing the leader follower


compressor system.

Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as


leader.

Push READ.
- The compressor is selected.
- The circle around the compressor starts flashing.

Push Master.

MASTER

- The text changes to leader.


5
Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as the
first follower.
6

Push READ.
- The compressor is selected.
- The circle around the compressor starts flashing.

1.ST
STAND
BY

Push 1.st standby.

- The text changes to follower.


1
Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as the
second follower.
2

Push READ.
- The compressor is selected.
- The circle around the compressor starts flashing.

NEXT
STAND
BY

Push Next standby.


- The text changes to follower (2).

How to reset compressors

The compressor logic must be reset when the compressor has


tripped or as the result of a start failure.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

171

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

ALARM
ACK

Push Alarm ack to acknowledge the alarm.

Correct the problem.

Select the mimic display showing the compressor .

Move the cursor to the symbol for the compressor you want
to reset.

Push READ.
- The compressor is selected.
- The circle around the compressor starts flashing.

RESET

Push RESET.
- The circle around the compressor symbol changes from red
to grey.

4.3.4

How to open or close valves

Valve control functions

The following functions and features are available:


Monitoring of the controlled valve
Pulse or analogue control of valves with analogue feedback
Blocking from opening
Blocking from closing
Blocking from operation (local control)
Deviation monitoring
Update alarm status
Update event status
Optional time stamp on every change of operation, allowing the
system to record time of positioning
Valve control types

The valve control can operate the following types of


configurations:
On-off valves

Single acting: One relay for control.


Single acting with one feedback: One relay for control and one
binary feedback.
Single acting with two feedbacks: One relay for control and
two binary feedbacks.

172

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

Single acting with no feedback: No feedback, only single


acting control.
Double acting: Two relays for control.
Double acting with one feedback: Two relays for control and
one binary feedback.
Double acting with two feedbacks: Two relays for control and
two binary feedbacks.
Double acting with no feedback: No feedback, only double
acting control.
Analogue positioning valves

Analogue out: Step-less positioning.


Analogue out with analogue feedback: Step-less control with
analogue feedback.
Double acting positioning: Pulsed positioning.
Double acting with analogue feedback: Pulsed positioning
with analogue valve feedback.
Double acting with one analogue feedback and two binary
feedbacks: Pulsed positioning with one analogue valve
feedback and two binary end feedbacks.
Monitoring

Monitoring is used when only binary feedbacks are interfaced to


the positioner, and no relay or other control is provided.
One feedback: No control, one binary feedbacks.
Two feedbacks: No control, two binary feedbacks.
Valve symbols

Different valve symbols are used to indicate different types of


valves.
Figure 103 Valve symbol.
Figure 104 Three way valve symbol.
Valve symbol colours

Valve symbols have colours according to the state they are in.
Single and double acting valves

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Green: Open
Grey: Closed
Yellow: Intermediate (opening or closing)
Blue: Blocked
Red: Alarm
White: Local - not ready

173

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Throttle valves

- Green: Feedback at setpoint


- Grey: Closed/stopped
- Yellow: Feedback outside deadband
- Blue: Blocked
- Red: Alarm
- White: Local - not ready
Throttle valves have set points between 0 and 100 %.
Note

As a default, valves will give an alarm on timeout - when not


reaching the end position.
How to open on-off valves

Select the mimic display showing the valve.

Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to
operate.

Push READ.
- The symbol colour is flashing to indicate that it is selected.
- Tag, tag description and the current status of the valve is
displayed at the bottom left of the display.

Push ACTIVATE/START.
- The current status and the new command is displayed.
- The symbol colour changes to green.

How to close on-off valves

Select the mimic display showing the valve.

Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to
operate.

Push READ.
- The valve is selected. Tag, tag description and the current
state of the valve is displayed at the bottom left of the display.
- The symbol colour is flashing to indicate that it is selected.

Push DEACTIVATE/ STOP.


- The current status and new the new command is displayed.
- The symbol colour changes to grey.

How to operate analogue valves

174

Select the mimic display showing the valve.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to
operate.

Push READ.
- The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected.
- The text Enter new setpoint (0.0-100.0 %): is displayed.
* 0% - Closed
* 100% - Open
4
Type in the new setpoint.
5

Push Enter.
- The valve setpoint is changed.

How to operate throttle valves

1
2

Select the mimic display showing the valve.


Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to
operate.
Push READ.
- The equipment is selected.
- The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected.
- The following window is displayed:

Figure 105 Menu for analogue valves.


Open valve to 100%

To open the valve to 100% use the trackball to point to the


open button and push Read.
- The status changes, first to opening then to opened.

Close valve to 0%

To close the valve to 0% use the trackball to point to the close


button and push Read.
- The status changes, first to closing then to closed.

Throttle mode

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

To set the setpoint to a value between 0 and 100% use the


trackball to point to the Throttle mode check box and push
Read.
- The menu buttons changes to increase and decrease.

175

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Figure 106 Menu for analogue valves in throttle mode.


7

Move the cursor over the Increase or Decrease button.

Push READ.

Type in the new setpoint value.

10

Push ENTER.
- The setpoint changes.

How to reset valves

Resetting of valves is required on timeout.


1

Select the mimic display showing the valve.

Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to
reset.

Push READ.
- The valve is selected. Tag, tag description and the current
status of the valve is displayed at the bottom left of the
display.
- The symbol colour is flashing to indicate that it is selected.

RESET

Push RESET.
- The symbol colour changes to grey.

4.3.5

How to operate a PID controller

PID controller symbol

The PID controller keeps a process signal at a pre-defined value.


The controller is used for temperature controlled valves, pressure
controlled valves, frequency controlled pumps etc.

176

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

Valve feedback
Process
setpoint
Process
Process feedback

Figure 107 PID controller.


The controller can operate in two modes:
* Active (on): This is the normal PID controller mode. The
controller operates when active.
* Deactive (off). The PID controller does not control the
process. If the controller operates on an actuator, manual
valve positioning is possible.

FW COOLING
100
ACTIVE

Status

TEMP.
62
Deg. C

Setp.
60
Deg. C

Actuator
Setp.
28
FB
32

Process
feedback
Process
setpoint
Alarm status
indicator
PID controller
setpoint
Actual value

100%
Actuator

Actuator setpoint, used used


when control is deactive
Actuator feedback
Indicator green when active,
grey when deactive

Figure 108 PID controller symbol.


PID controller symbol colours

Green: Active
Blue: Blocked or configuration fail
Grey: Deactive
Red: Alarm

To select a PID controller

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Select the mimic display showing the PID controller.

177

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller you
want to operate.

Push READ.
- The PID controller is selected. A flashing yellow square is
displayed around the controller.
- Tag, tag description and the current state of the PID
controller is displayed at the bottom left of the display.

ME HFO TEMP
200
ACTIVE

Status

TEMP.

Setp.

120

123

Deg. C

Deg. C

Actuator
Setp.
67
Feedb. 67

100%

Figure 109 Symbol for an active PID controller.


To activate the controller

Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller you
want to operate and push READ.

Push ACTIVATE/START.
- The Active circle turns green. The controller setpoint is
shown in the Setp. field. Actuator setpoint is shown both as
a percentage and a bargraph. A setpoint command is sent to
the controller.

To enter a new setpoint push READ.

- The prompt ACT., DEACT. or Enter New PROCESS setpoint


is displayed.
4
Type in the new value using the numeric keyboard.
5

Push ENTER.
- The new process setpoint is displayed. The PID controller
adjusts the actuator to make the process feedback equal to the
new setpoint.

To deactivate the controller

178

Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller you
want to operate and push READ.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

Push DEACTIVATE/STOP.
- The Active circle turns grey. The controller setpoint is no
longer displayed, but showing N/A in the Setp. field.
Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and a
bargraph. A setpoint command is sent to the positioner.

To enter a new actuator setpoint push READ.


- The prompt ACT., DEACT. or Enter New PROCESS setpoint
is displayed.

Type in the new value using the numeric keyboard.

Push ENTER.
- The new actuator setpoint is displayed.

Note

You must manually adjust the actuator to make the process


feedback equal to the required value.

ME HFO TEMP
200
ACTIVE

Status

TEMP.

Setp.

N/A

123

Deg. C

Deg. C

Actuator
Setp.
67
Feedb. 67

100%

Figure 110 Symbol for a PID controller that is not active.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

179

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

4.4

Local Operator Station


4.4.1

How to operate pumps or fans


from the Local Operator Station

To operate pumps or fans from the Local Operator Station do the


following:
1

The Local Operator Station must be physically connected to


the same CAN segment as the DPU controlling the pump or
fan.

When connected push MENU UP.


- You should now see the LOS top menu and a list of DPUs
connected to the CAN segment.

Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons to


select the DPU controlling the pump or fan. The selected
DPU must be displayed in line two.

Push MENU DOWN to select it.


- Observe the DPU Top Menu.

Push MENU DOWN to select the Tag Overview Menu.


- Observe the DPU Tag Overview display.
- Channel numbers are indicated on the left side.
- Function tag channels for pumps and fans are organised as
follows:

180

DPU module

Function tag channels


for starters, valves etc.

RAi-16

33 - 47

RAi-32

33 - 47

RIO-C1

33 - 47

RIO-C2

33 - 47

dPSC

1 - 99

Select the function tag channel for the pump or fan you want
to operate using the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN
buttons.

Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between Tag


Description and Tag Name.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

33

AM132S

Ready for Start

Tag
name

Tag
status

Channel
number

Push MENU DOWN to go to the Tag Details Starter display.


- Observe the Tag Details Starter display.
- In this display you can change database parameters for this
tag. (Described elsewhere).
- To be able to control pumps or fans the system requires a
password.

Push F1 to select the Common Menu.

10

Push SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN to select the


Password parameter.

11

Enter the Password. (Described elsewhere).

12

Push ENTER.

13

If not already selected, push F4 to select the Application


Menu.

14

Push and hold MENU DOWN and at the same time push F2.
- Observe the Commands for Starter Menu.
- Available commands for the function tag are displayed.

15

Use the SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN buttons to see all


available commands.
- The first set of commands are:

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

* F1

Start LF (low forward, normal start)

* F2

Start HF (high forward)

* F3

Start LR (low reverse)

* F4

Start HR (high reverse)

181

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Commands for Starter


DPU 032/01.05.24
Start commands
:
2 /
120
33 AM132S
Ready for start
|Start LF |Start HF |Start LR |Start HR

Figure 111 Typical control display starter, first set.


- The second set of commands are:
* F1

Stop

* F2

Reset

* F3

Auto

* F4

Semi Auto

Commands for Starter


DPU 032/01.05.24
Stop & aux commands :
2 /
120
33 AM132S
Ready for start
|Stop
|Reset
|Auto
|Semi Auto

Figure 112 Typical control display starter, second set.


- The meaning of lamp indication for the function keys are:
* Fixed light - function active
* Flashing - function activating
* Dark - not active
16

Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between the next and


previous function tag at the same operational level.

17

To exit push MENU UP several times until you reach the Tag
Overview display.

18

Push F1 to disconnect the DPU.


- The DPU list is displayed.

182

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

4.4.2

How to operate valves from the


Local Operator Station

To operate valves from the Local Operator Station do the


following:
1

The Local Operator Station must be physically connected to


the same CAN segment as the DPU controlling the valve.

When connected push MENU UP.


- You should now see the LOS top menu and a list of DPUs
connected to the CAN segment.

Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons to


select the DPU controlling the valve. The selected DPU must
be displayed in line two.

Push MENU DOWN to select it.


- Observe the DPU Top Menu.

Push MENU DOWN to go to the Tag Overview Menu.


- Observe the DPU Tag Overview display.
- Channel numbers are indicated on the left side.
- Function tag channels for valves are organised as follows:

DPU module

Function tag channels


for starters, valves etc.

RAi-16

33 - 47

RAi-32

33 - 47

RIO-C1

33 - 47

RIO-C2

33 - 47

dPSC

1 - 99

Select the function tag channel for the valve you want to
operate using the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN
buttons.

36 NM 13P
Channel
number

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Tag
name

Closed

AUTO
Tag
status

183

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between Tag


Description and Tag Name.

Push MENU DOWN to go to the Tag Details Positioner


display.
- Observe the Tag Details Positioner display.
- In this display you can change database parameters for this
tag. (Described elsewhere).
- To be able to control valves the system requires a password.

Push F1 to select the Common Menu.

10

Push SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN to select the


Password parameter.

11

Enter the Password. (Described elsewhere).

12

Push ENTER.

13

If not already selected push F4 to select the Application


Menu.

14

Push and hold MENU DOWN and at the same time push F2.
- Observe the commands for the Positioner Menu.
- Available commands for the function tag are displayed.

15

Use the SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN buttons to see all


available commands.
- The first set of commands are:
* F1 Open
* F2 Close
* F3 Reset
Commands for Positioner DPU 106/02.11.27
Adjust Setpoint
0.0
36 NM 64P
Closed
Auto
|Open
|Close
|Reset
|

Figure 113 Typical control display for positioner, first set.


- The second set of commands are:
* F1 Thr.Open (throttle open)

184

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process control system

* F2

Thr.Close (throttle close)

* F3

Auto

* F4

Semi Auto

Commands for Positioner DPU 106/02.11.27


Not used for analog:
2 /
120
R
36 NM 64P
Closed
Auto
|Thr.Open |Thr.Close| Auto
|Semi Auto

Figure 114 Typical control display for positioner, second set.


- The meaning of lamp indication for the function keys are:
* Fixed light - function active
* Flashing - function activating
* Dark - not active.
16

Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between the next and


previous valve function tag at the same operational level.

17

To exit push MENU UP several times until you reach the Tag
Overview display.

18

Push F1 to disconnect the DPU.


- The DPU list is displayed.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

185

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

5 POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM


5.1

Introduction
This chapter teaches you how to use the power management
system of the DataChief C20. It is intended for personnel familiar
with the Getting Started and Alarm and Monitoring sections
of this manual. The following subjects are covered:
- About the power management system
- Remote Operator Station process control
- Midi Operator Station process control

186

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Power management system

5.2

About the power management system


Changeover functionality

Any alarm for the generator set can be configured to have change
over functionality. When any of these alarms are given, a standby
diesel generator starts and connects. The failing generator will then
unload and disconnect. After the generator is disconnected the
diesel may continue running, cool down and stop or stop directly,
dependent on the configuration.
Automatic start and connect on blackout

When a main switchboard blackout occurs, the 1.st. standby diesel


generator will start and connect. If it fails to start or connect, the
next standby diesel generator will start and connect. It is possible
to configure the system to start more than one standby generator
on blackout.
Load dependent start and stop of standby
generators

When a high load occurs on on the connected generator(s), the 1.st


standby generator will start and connect. When the load decreases
enough to let a generator disconnect without overloading the
remaining, the 1.st to stop generator will disconnect and stop.
Control of heavy consumers start request and
start granted

When a heavy consumer start request is received, the power


management system will check for available power.
* If enough power is available and a predefined number of
generators are connected, the power management system
gives a start granted to the consumer.
* If enough power is not available, the standby generator(s)
will automatically start and connect. When enough power
is available, a start granted is given to the consumer.
* When more than one heavy consumer sends a request for
start, only one is granted at a time. The power
management system remembers all start requests and
enables them in sequence.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

187

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

5.3

Remote Operator Station


5.3.1

Overview

The power management system is mainly operated through a


mimic picture reflecting the ships power distribution system. The
system can manage electrical generators driven by diesel engine,
steam turbine or the main engine. The operator controls have
different configurations dependent on the type of generator drive.
A typical mimic picture is shown below:

Figure 115 Typical power management system mimic picture.

5.3.2

How to operate a generator set


with start/stop control

Generator set symbol colour interpretation

A generator with its prime mover and circuit breaker (as seen
below) is called a generator set. The following information is
contained in the colours used for the generator set.

188

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Power management system

Circuit braker symbol


y
y
y

Red dot: Circuit breaker alarm


In disconnected position:
Gray: Open
Yellow: Syncronizing/connecting
In connected position:
Green: Connected
Yellow: Disconnecting

Generator symbol
y
y
y

Red dot: Generator alarm


Gray: Stopped
Green: Running, ready to connect

Prime mover symbol


y
y
y
y
y

Red dot: Prime mover alarm


Gray: Stopped
Grey and yellow: Starting
Green: Running
Green and yellow: Stopping

Generator set information box

Each generator set has an information box containing the


following information:
Mode: Local/semi-auto/auto.
Operational state of the generator set.
Standby status information, priority in brackets.
Low load auto stop blocked.
Fuel selection/load control selection.

Figure 116 Generator set information box.


To display the control dialog

Select the the power management mimic picture.

Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control.

Push the READ button.


- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the
generator set. This dialog will vary according to how the
generator set is configured. The following is a maximum
configuration:

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

189

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Push to start the generator.


Push to connect the generator.
Push to disconnect the generator.
Push to stop the generator.
Push to turn off load dependent stop function.
Push to set the generator to semi-auto mode.
Push to give the generator lower priority.
Push to select diesel oil only.
Push to turn on load dependent stop function.
Push to select frequency and load control by governor.
Push to reset alarm messages.
Push to set the generator to auto mode.
Push to give the generator higher priority.
Push to select heavy fuel/diesel oil change over logic.
Push to select frequency and load control by DataChie

Figure 117 Control dialog for generator set with start/stop.


Semi Auto mode

In semi auto mode the operator controls the generator set using the
buttons in the dialog to start or stop, connect or disconnect it
according to the load condition.
Note

For Semi Auto mode the following applies:


* A generator set must be started before it can be connected.
* A disconnect will unload and disconnect the generator but
the diesel will remain running.
* The generator set will not be part of the standby system.
To start a generator

Push Start.
- The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means
it is starting.
- Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that
it is running idle.
- Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is
running nominal and ready to connect.

To connect a generator

This is only possible when the prime mover is running at nominal


speed.
1

Push Connect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is synchronizing.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns
green. This means that the generator is connected.

190

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Power management system

To disconnect a generator

Push Disconnect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is unloading.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns
grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.

To stop a generator

This is only possible when the circuit breaker is disconnected.


1
Push Stop.
- The text cooling down is displayed. This means that the
generator set is cooling down. After cool down time out the
prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that
the prime mover is stopping.
- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the
prime mover has stopped.
2
To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling
down, push Stop twice.
Auto mode

In auto mode the generator is automatically started and stopped


according to the load condition and the priority setting.
Note

For Auto mode the following applies:


* A disconnect command will cause the following
sequence: Unloading, disconnect, cool down and stop.
* A stop command will cause the following sequence:
Unloading, disconnect and direct stop.
* A connect command will cause the following sequence:
Starting, synchronizing and connect.
* A start command will cause a starting sequence only.
To connect a generator

This is only possible when the prime mover is stopped and ready
for start.
1
Push Connect.
- The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means
it is starting.
- Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that
it is running idle.
- Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is
running nominal and ready to connect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is synchronizing.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns
green. This means that the generator is connected.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

191

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

To disconnect a generator

Push Disconnect.

- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is unloading.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns
grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
- The text cooling down is displayed. This means that the
generator set is cooling down. After cool down time out the
prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that
the prime mover is stopping.
- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the
prime mover has stopped.
2
To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling
down, push Stop twice.
To stop a generator

When the circuit breaker is connected:


1

Push Stop.

- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is unloading.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns
grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the
prime mover has stopped. This is a direct stop without
cooling down period.
When the circuit breaker is disconnected:
1

Push Stop.

- The text cooling down is displayed. This means that the


generator set is cooling down. After cool down time out the
prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that
the prime mover is stopping.
- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the
prime mover has stopped.
2
To stop the prime mover immediately push Stop twice.
To start a generator

Push Start.
- The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means
it is starting.
- Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that
it is running idle.
- Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is
running nominal and ready to connect.

192

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Power management system

Stop block On/Off

Push On to block the load dependent stop function.

- This means that the generator will not stop when there is a
low load on the main switchboard.
2
Push Off to activate the load dependent stop function.
- This means that the generator will stop when there is a low
load on the main switchboard.
Pri. Higher/Lower

The generator set with the highest priority will start first and stop
last. The generator set with the lowest priority will start last and
stop first.
1

Push Pri. Higher to give the generator set a higher standby


priority. The indicated standby number is lowered by one.

Push Pri. Lower to give the generator set a lower standby


priority.The indicated standby number is increased by one.

HFO - Heavy Fuel Oil

Push HFO to activate the heavy fuel oil change over logic.
- The heavy fuel oil change over logic will start and stop the
prime mover using diesel oil, but will switch to heavy fuel
oil during loaded condition.

DO - Diesel Oil

Push DO to run the prime mover on diesel oil only.


- The heavy fuel oil change over logic is not in use.

Droop

Push Droop to select frequency and load control by the


DataChief C20, based on diesel engine speed governor
droop curve (static).

Isochron - Isochroneous

Push Isochron to select frequency and load control by the


diesel engine speed governor.

Reset

Push Reset to reset any alarm messages.


- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!

5.3.3

How to operate a generator set


without start/stop control

Applicable for shaft generators.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

193

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

To display the control dialog

Select the power management mimic picture.

Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control.

Push the READ button.


- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the
generator set.
- The following illustration shows what each of the buttons are
used for:
Push to connect the generator.
Push to disconnect the generator.
Push to reset alarm messages.

Figure 118 Control dialog for generator set without start/stop.


Connect

Push Connect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is synchronizing.
- When the shaft generator is syncronizing, the diesel
generators connected to the bus bar will regulate the
frequency just below the frequency of the shaft generator.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns
green. This means that the generator is connected.

Disconnect

Push Disconnect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is unloading.
- When the shaft generator is unloading, the diesel generators
connected to the same bus bar will increase their power to
take the load off the shaft generator.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns
grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.

Reset

Push Reset to reset any alarm messages.


- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!

5.3.4

How to operate a generator set


without start, stop with adjustable
load setpoint

Applicable for steam turbine generators.

194

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Power management system

To display the control dialog

Select the the power management mimic picture.

Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control.

Push the READ button.


- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the
generator set.
- The following illustration shows what each of the buttons are
used for:
Push to connect the generator.
Push to disconnect the generator.
Push to activate the new load setpoint value.
Push to reset alarm messages.
Insert the load setpoint value here.

Figure 119 Control dialog for generator set without start/stop


with adjustable load setpoint.
Connect

Push Connect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is synchronizing.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns
green. This means that the generator is connected.

Disconnect

Push Disconnect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is unloading.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns
grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.

Load setp. - load setpoint

Move the cursor to the load setpoint text box.

Push the READ button to select it.

Type in the new load setpoint.

Push OK.
- The generator will change the load according to the new
setpoint.

Reset

Push Reset to reset any alarm messages.


- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

195

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

5.3.5

How to operate the main


switchboard controller

Main switchboard controller symbols

The main switchboard is available with two different layouts


dependent on the system configuration. The following information
is provided:
Available (spare) power.
Frequency of generated power.
Voltage of generated power.
Status: Local/semi-auto/auto.
Low load autostop blocked.
Symmetric/asymmetric load
sharing mode.
Amount of power generated.
Operational state, red text indicates
an alarm condition.

Figure 120 Main switchboard controller alternative 1.


Available (spare) power.
Operational state, red text indicates an
alarm condition.

Figure 121 Main switchboard controller alternative 2.


To display the control dialog

Select the the power management mimic picture.

Move the cursor to the main switchboard.

Push the READ button.


- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the the
main switchboard.
- The following illustration shows what each of the buttons are
used for:

196

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Power management system

Push to select symmetric load sharing.


Push to select asymmetric load sharing.
Push to set the main switchboard controller to semiauto mode.
Push to set the main switchboard controller to auto
mode.
Push to reset alarm messages.

Figure 122 Control dialog for the main switchboard.


Auto

Push Auto to set the main switchboard controller in auto


mode. The standby and blackout recovery functions are in
operation.
- When the load increases above an adjustable limit the
standby generator with the highest priority starts.
- When the load decreases below an adjustable limit the
standby generator with the lowest priority number stops.
- At a blackout the standby generator with the highest priority
starts.
- At a failure on a connected generator the generator with the
highest priority starts. A changeover takes place.

SemiAuto

Note

Used for commissioning purposes, do not use for normal


operation! Selecting SemiAuto will cause a Non Standby alarm.
1

Push SemiAuto to set the main switchboard controller in


SemiAuto mode. This will deactivate all logic mentioned
under Auto above.

Sym - Symmetric

Push Sym for symmetric load sharing between the


generators.
- The load is shared equally between the generators.

Asym - Asymmetric

Push Asym for asymmetric load sharing between two


connected generators. When more than two generators are
connected the asymmetric load sharing is switched of
automatically and will use symmetric load sharing.
- The asymmetric load sharing will attempt the following:
* Run one of the two generators close to the low limit of
20%.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

197

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

* Run one of the two generators close to the high load limit
of about 80%.
* After an adjustable period of time the two generators will
swap load setpoints.
Reset

Push to reset the main switchboard controller when in state


Operation Blocked, Remote Control.

5.3.6

How to operate a bus tie breaker

To display the control dialog

The control dialog is project specific and may vary from the
illustration below.
1

Select the the power management mimic picture.

Move the cursor to the bus tie breaker.

Push the READ button.


- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the the
bus tie breaker is displayed.

Connect

Push Connect.
- The bus tie breaker symbol turns grey. This means that the
bus tie breaker is closed.

Disconnect

Push Disconnect.
- The bus tie breaker symbol turns grey. This means that the
bus tie breaker is open.

Reset

Push Reset to reset any alarm messages.


- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!

5.3.7

How to operate the one touch auto


sequence

One touch auto sequencing allows you to set the main switchboard
to a set of predefined configurations by pushing a button.
One touch auto sequence controller symbol

To simplify power management one touch auto sequencing allows


you to set the main switchboard to a set of predefined
configurations by pushing a button. Typical main switchboard
configurations are:

198

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Power management system

* DG-mode (diesel generator mode)


* Manoeuvre mode
* PTO-mode (shaft generator mode)
* PTI-mode (electric propulsion mode)

Figure 123 One touch auto sequence symbol, indicating


current state of operation.
To display the control dialog

The control dialog is project specific and may vary from the
illustration below.
1

Select the the power management mimic picture.

Move the cursor over the one touch auto sequence symbol.

Push the READ button.


- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the the
one touch auto sequence.
- The following illustration shows what each of the buttons are
used for:

Push a mode
button to activate it.
Push to abort the
selected sequence.
Push to reset.

Figure 124 One touch auto sequence dialog box.


To select modes

Push the button for the desired mode.


- The system automatically makes the necessary actions to set
the main switchboard to this mode.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

199

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

5.4

Midi Operator Station


5.4.1

Overview

The power management system is mainly operated through a


mimic picture reflecting the ships power distribution system. The
system can manage electrical generators driven by diesel engine,
steam turbine or the main engine. The operator controls have
different configurations dependent on the type of generator drive.
A typical mimic picture is shown below.

Figure 125 Typical power management system mimic picture.

5.4.2

How to operate the main


switchboard controller

To display the control picture

ENTER

Select the the power management mimic picture.

Using the navigator key move the cursor to select one of the
switchboards.

Push Enter.
- A new picture showing the switchboard and text for the
function keys appear.

200

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Power management system

Figure 126 Typical main switchboard controller.

F1 - F4

Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all


available functions for the function keys.
- The number of functions will vary according to how the
switchboard is configured.

Push the function key for the desired function.


- The following functions are available:
* Symmetric
* Asymmetric
* Connect more power
* Disconnect surplus power
* Stop block on
* Stop block off
* Reset
* Auto
* Semi-auto

Symmetric
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Symmetric for symmetric load


sharing between the generators.
- The load is shared equally between the generators.

Asymmetric
F1 - F4

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Push the function key for Asymmetric for asymmetric load


sharing between two connected generators. When more than
two generators are connected the asymmetric load sharing is
switched of automatically and will use symmetric load
sharing.
- The asymmetric load sharing will attempt the following:

201

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

* Run one of the two generators close to the low limit of


20%.
* Run one of the two generators close to the high load limit
of about 80%.
* After an adjustable period of time the two generators will
swap load setpoints.
Reset
F1 - F4

Push the function key for to reset the main switchboard


controller when in state Operation Blocked, Remote
Control.

Auto
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Auto to set the main switchboard
controller in auto mode. The standby and blackout recovery
functions are in operation.
- When the load increases above an adjustable limit the
standby generator with the highest priority starts.
- When the load decreases below an adjustable limit the
standby generator with the lowest priority number stops.
- At a blackout the standby generator with the highest priority
starts.
- At a failure on a connected generator the generator with the
highest priority starts. A changeover takes place.

SemiAuto

Note

Used for commissioning purposes, do not use for normal


operation! Selecting SemiAuto will cause a Non Standby alarm.
1

Push the function key for SemiAuto to set the main


switchboard controller in SemiAuto mode. This will
deactivate all logic mentioned under Auto above.

5.4.3

How to operate a generator set


with start/stop control

Generator set symbol colour interpretation

A generator with its prime mover and circuit breaker (as seen
below) is called a generator set. The following information is
contained in the colours used for the generator set.

202

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Power management system

Circuit braker symbol


y
y
y

Red dot: Circuit breaker alarm


In disconnected position:
Gray: Open
Yellow: Syncronizing/connecting
In connected position:
Green: Connected
Yellow: Disconnecting

Generator symbol
y
y

Red dot: Generator alarm


Gray: Stopped

Green: Running, ready to connect

Prime mover symbol


y
y
y
y

Red dot: Prime mover alarm


Gray: Stopped
Grey and yellow: Starting
Green: Running

Green and yellow: Stopping

To display the control picture

ENTER

Select the the power management mimic picture.

Using the navigator key move the cursor to the generator set
you want to control.

Push Enter.
- A new picture showing this generator set and text for the
function keys appear.

Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all


available functions for the function keys.
- The number of functions will vary according to how the
generator set is configured.

F1 - F4

Push the function key for the desired function.


- The following functions are available:
* Connect
* Disconnect
* Reset
* Start
* Stop
* Auto
* Semi-auto

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

203

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

* Stop block on
* Stop block off
* Pri. higher
* Pri. lower
* Switch genset

Figure 127 Generator set with start stop control.


To display detailed information

The following detailed information displays are available:


* Generator frequency
* Generator voltage
* Generator current
* Generator load
* Generator relative load
1

Select a generator set as described above.

Using the navigator key move the cursor to the information


you want to display.

Figure 128 Use the navigator to go between these selections.


ENTER

Push Enter.
- A new picture showing the detail display is shown. The
following is a detail display for frequency.

204

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Power management system

Figure 129 Frequency display.


4

Push Enter again to display a tag details view for this tag.
- A new picture showing the tag details view is shown. The
following is a tag details view for a frequency tag.

Figure 130 Tag details view for a frequency tag.


5

Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all


available information.

Semi Auto mode

In semi auto mode the operator controls the generator set using the
function keys to start or stop, connect or disconnect it according to
the load condition.
Note

For Semi Auto mode the following applies:


* A generator set must be started before it can be connected.
* A disconnect will unload and disconnect the generator but
the diesel will remain running.
* The generator set will not be part of the standby system.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

205

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

To start a generator
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Start.


- The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means
it is starting.
- Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that
it is running idle.
- Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is
running nominal and ready to connect.

To connect a generator

This is only possible when the prime mover is running at nominal


speed.
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Connect.


- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is synchronizing.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns
green. This means that the generator is connected.

To disconnect a generator
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Disconnect.


- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is unloading.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns
grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.

To stop a generator

This is only possible when the circuit breaker is disconnected.


F1 - F4

Push the function key for Stop.


- The text cooling down is displayed. This means that the
generator set is cooling down. After cool down time out the
prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that
the prime mover is stopping.
- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the
prime mover has stopped.

206

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Power management system

F1 - F4

To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling


down, push the function key for Stop twice.

Auto mode

In auto mode the generator is automatically started and stopped


according to the load condition and the priority setting.
Note

For Auto mode the following applies:


* A disconnect command will cause the following
sequence: Unloading, disconnect, cool down and stop.
* A stop command will cause the following sequence:
Unloading, disconnect and direct stop.
* A connect command will cause the following sequence:
Starting, synchronizing and connect.
* A start command will cause a starting sequence only.
To connect a generator

This is only possible when the prime mover is stopped and ready
for start.
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Connect.


- The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means
it is starting.
- Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that
it is running idle.
- Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is
running nominal and ready to connect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is synchronizing.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns
green. This means that the generator is connected.

To disconnect a generator
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Disconnect.


- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is unloading.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns
grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
- The text cooling down is displayed. This means that the
generator set is cooling down. After cool down time out the
prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that
the prime mover is stopping.
- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the
prime mover has stopped.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

207

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

F1 - F4

To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling


down, push Stop twice.

To stop a generator

When the circuit breaker is connected:


F1 - F4

Push the function key for Stop.


- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is unloading.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns
grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the
prime mover has stopped. This is a direct stop without
cooling down period.
When the circuit breaker is disconnected:

F1 - F4

Push the function key for Stop.


- The text cooling down is displayed. This means that the
generator set is cooling down. After cool down time out the
prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that
the prime mover is stopping.
- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the
prime mover has stopped.

F1 - F4

To stop the prime mover immediately push Stop twice.

To start a generator
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Start.


- The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means
it is starting.
- Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that
it is running idle.
- Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is
running nominal and ready to connect.

Stop block On/Off

208

F1 - F4

Push the function key for Stop block on to block the load
dependent stop function.
- This means that the generator will not stop when there is a
low load on the main switchboard.

F1 - F4

Push the function key for Stop block off to activate the load
dependent stop function.
- This means that the generator will stop when there is a low
load on the main switchboard.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Power management system

Pri. Higher/Lower

The generator set with the highest priority will start first and stop
last. The generator set with the lowest priority will start last and
stop first.
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Pri. Higher to give the generator
set a higher standby priority. The indicated standby number
is lowered by one.

F1 - F4

Push the function key for Pri. Lower to give the generator
set a lower standby priority. The indicated standby number
is increased by one.

HFO - Heavy Fuel Oil


F1 - F4

Push the function key for HFO to activate the heavy fuel oil
change over logic.
- The heavy fuel oil change over logic will start and stop the
prime mover using diesel oil, but will switch to heavy fuel
oil during loaded condition.

DO - Diesel Oil
F1 - F4

Push the function key for DO to run the prime mover on


diesel oil only.
- The heavy fuel oil change over logic is not in use.

Droop
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Droop to select frequency and load
control by the DataChief C20, based on diesel engine speed
governor droop curve (static).

Isochron - Isochroneous
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Isochron to select frequency and


load control by the diesel engine speed governor.

Reset
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages.
- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!

5.4.4

How to operate a generator set


without start/stop control

Applicable for shaft generators.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

209

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

To display the control picture

ENTER

Select the the power management mimic picture.

Using the navigator key move the cursor to the generator set
you want to control.

Push Enter.
- A new picture showing this generator set and text for the
function keys appear.

Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all


available functions for the function keys.
- The number of functions will vary according to how the
generator set is configured.

F1 - F4

Push the function key for the desired function.


- The following functions are available:
* Connect
* Disconnect
* Reset

Figure 131 Generator set without start/stop.


Connect
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Connect.


- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is synchronizing.
- When the shaft generator is synchronizing, the diesel
generators connected to the bus bar will regulate the
frequency just below the frequency of the shaft generator.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns
green. This means that the generator is connected.

210

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Power management system

Disconnect
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Disconnect.


- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is unloading.
- When the shaft generator is unloading, the diesel generators
connected to the same bus bar will increase their power to
take the load off the shaft generator.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns
grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.

Reset
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages.
- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!

5.4.5

How to operate a generator set


without start, stop with adjustable
load setpoint

Applicable for steam turbine generators.


To display the control picture

ENTER

Select the power management mimic picture.

Using the navigator key move the cursor to the generator set
you want to control.

Push Enter.
- A new picture showing this generator set and text for the
function keys appear.

Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all


available functions for the function keys.
- The number of functions will vary according to how the
generator set is configured.

F1 - F4

Push the function key for the desired function.


- The following functions are available:
* Connect
* Disconnect
* Load setp.
* Reset

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

211

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Connect
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Connect.


- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is synchronizing.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns
green. This means that the generator is connected.

Disconnect
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Disconnect.


- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the
generator is unloading.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns
grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.

Reset
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages.
- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!

5.4.6

How to operate a bus tie breaker

To display the control picture

The control picture is project specific and may vary from the
illustration below.

ENTER

Select the the power management mimic picture.

Using the navigator key move the cursor to the bust tie
breaker you want to control.

Push Enter.
- A new picture showing the bus tie breaker is shown.

212

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Power management system

Figure 132 Typical bus tie breaker symbol.

F1 - F4

Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all


available functions for the function keys.

Push the function key for the desired mode.


- The system automatically makes the necessary actions to set
the main switchboard to this mode.

Connect
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Connect.


- The bus tie breaker symbol turns grey. This means that the
bus tie breaker is closed.

Disconnect
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Disconnect.


- The bus tie breaker symbol turns grey. This means that the
bus tie breaker is open.

Reset
F1 - F4

Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages.
- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

213

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

6 REFERENCE GUIDE
6.1

Introduction
This document gives an overview of parameters that can be
inspected and adjusted from a Local or Remote Operator Station.
Where applicable other details of the parameters are included.
The following subjects are covered:
- Tage type overview
- Alarm and monitoring parameters
- Engineers safety

214

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Reference guide

6.2

Tag type overview


The following is a list of available tag types in the DataChief C20
Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power
management.
A tag type defines the software used to read a channel on a
Distributed Processing Unit. A channel is where a signal
connected to a Distributed Processing Unit. The tag type defines
witch application to run on the signal.
Example: If channel no. 2 in a Remote Analogue Input module
(RAi-16) is tag type 20, the input signal is 4- 20 mA.

6.2.1

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Basic tag types

Tag type number

Channel type

Undefined type

Voltage +-- 0.1

Voltage +-- 1

Voltage +-- 5

Voltage +-- 10

Voltage 0 -- 1

Voltage 0 -- 1

Voltage 0 -- 5

Voltage 0 -- 10

11

Milli amps +-- 1

12

Milli amps +-- 5

13

Milli amps +-- 10

14

Milli amps +-- 20

16

Milli amps 0 -- 1

17

Milli amps 0 -- 5

18

Milli amps 0 -- 10

19

Milli amps 0 -- 20

20

Milli amps 4 -- 20

22

PT 50

23

PT 100

24

PT 1000

26

Potmeter 1 K

27

Potmeter 5 K

29

On--off without check (RAi--16)

30

On--off single check (RAi--16)

31

On--off double check (RAi--16)

32

RDi--32 digital input

215

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Tag type number

Channel type

34

Counter event

35

Counter frequency

36

Counter time

38

TC element

40

AC voltage 10 bit

41

AC current 10 bit

43

Generator frequency

44

Bus freq.

45

Phase difference

46

Cosine phi

47

Phase velocity

49

Pick up

128

Exhaust mean

129

Exhaust deviation

130

Rio PLC type

131

DO 401 client

132

DOT (dig. out) handler

133

AO (an. out) 401 client

134

AO (analogue out) handler

135

Exhaust deviation limit

136

Alarm relay

137

Local alarm system

138

LOS 401 client

141

Rotating light handler

142

ASCII IO handler

143

SSC IO handler

144

DS 401 handler

200

Serial AI

201

Serial DI

255

System tag handler

150

Dead man handler

Exhaust tag types are: 128, 129 and 135.

6.2.2

Analogue out tags

Tag type and Distributed Processing Unit type defines the


analogue output channel type. If the Distributed Processing Unit
type is Remote Analogue Output module, the following analogue
output channel types are available:

216

Channel type number

Channel type

0 -- 10.0 Volt

+-- 10.0 Volt

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Reference guide

Channel type number

Channel type

0 -- 5.0 Volt

+-- 5.0 Volt

0 -- 20.0 mA

4 -- 20.0 mA

6.2.3

Relays

Binary out is defined as a channel in a Remote Digital Output


module. All channels in a Remote Digital Output module are
automatically an output channel type.

6.3

Alarm and monitoring parameters


6.3.1

Analogue input tag items

Parameter
Name

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Type

Adjust-able

Function

Enable Grad.
Alarm

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable aAlarm

Enable Alarm
Low

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable alarm

Enable Alarm
Low Low

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable alarm

Enable Alarm
High

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable alarm

Enable Alarm
High High

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable alarm

Enable Event
Low

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable event

Enable Event
Low Low

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable event

Enable Event
High

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable event

Enable Event
High High

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable event

Gradient Block
Limit

Number

Yes

Block if measured value is


< block limit

Gradient Limit

Number

Yes

Gradient alarm limit

Limit Alarm Low


Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm High

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm High


High

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Event Low


Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

217

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Parameter
Name

Type

Adjust-able

Function

Limit Event Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event High

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event High


High

Number

Yes

Event limit

Filter Time

Number

Yes

Time in 100 milliseconds

Dynamic Dead
Band

Number

Yes

Report value dead band


limit

Counts Low

Number

Yes

A/D minimum value

Counts High

Number

Yes

A/D maximum value

Eng.Units Low

Number

Yes

Instrument minimum value

Eng.Units High

Number

Yes

Instruments maximum
value

Raw Value

Number

No

Measured raw value directly from ADC

Raw Percent
Value

Number

No

Measured raw value n %


of range

Scaled Value

Number

No

Measured value scaled to


technical value

Filtered Value

Number

No

Filtered scaled value

Some of the parameters are further explained below.


Enable alarms and events

Alarms may be enabled or disabled by altering the value of the


enable parameters. Select YES for enable, NO for disable.
Gradient parameters

The gradient calculation uses the filtered value as input. In order


to make the gradient more robust against noise, it is calculated
based on a moving average over the three last samples of the
filtered value. When the process value falls below the Block limit
the gradient alarm will be blocked. Above this process value, the
gradient alarm is activated if the calculated gradient value exceeds
the Gradient Limit.
Block limit: A process value below this limit inhibits the
gradient alarm.
Gradient Limit: The gradient alarm is activated if the gradient
value in [units/sec] exceeds this limit.

6.3.2

Alarm and event limits

Alarm and event limits are entered in technical units. Each alarm
& event limit has its own enable flag. If the enable flag is set, the
alarm/event status will be updated. If the enable flag is not set the
corresponding status is cleared.

218

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Reference guide

The filtered process value is compared with four alarm and four
event limits. The alarm and event status is updated as follows (if
the enable flag is set):
1

LL= on, if Filtered_value < alarm_LL limit.

L = on, if Filtered_value < alarm_L limit.

H = on, if Filtered_value > alarm_H limit.

HH = on, if Filtered_value > alarm_HH limit.

Ev_1 = on, if Filtered_value > event_1 limit.

Ev_2 = on, if Filtered_value > event_2 limit.

Ev_3 = on, if Filtered_value > event_3 limit.

Ev_4 = on, if Filtered_value > event_4 limit.

The LL, L, H and HH alarms are activated as soon as the alarm


delays has expired.

6.3.3

Filter time

The filter function is a 2nd order Butterworth filter. The scaled


process value is filtered with a user defined filter time constant,
which defines the cut-off frequency for the filter. The time constant
resolution is 0.1 seconds. A time constant = 0 disables the filter,
hence the lowest cut-off frequency is 10 Hz with the time constant
set to 0.1 seconds.

6.3.4

Dynamic deadband

The dynamic dead band is entered in engineering units with the


same number of decimals as specified for the process value. The
dynamic dead band parameter is only in use if the external tag
parameter is set to YES. This parameter is used for dynamic update
of the process value for external tag users. When the process value
becomes greater/less than the last sent value with more than the
dynamic dead-band, a new value is sent.

6.3.5

Scaling parameters

The scaling parameters are given in corresponding pairs of


technical values and measured values read from the analogue to
digital converter.
The technical sensor range is: Eng.Units High Eng.Units Low.
The instrument range is: Counts High Counts Low.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

219

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Eng.
value

EU High

Counts Low

ADC Input
Counts High

EU Low
Figure 133 Scaling parameters.
Measured values

Each channel is sampled from a 16 bit analogue to digital converter


every 10 milliseconds. The result of this sampling is a value in the
range 0 65535 Counts. Depending on the type of signal
connected, the legal count range may be less. The table below
shows the count range for the different signal types available:
Code

220

Short Text

Counts High

Counts Low

VOLT_PM_01

45874

19660

VOLT_PM_1

45874

19660

VOLT_PM_5

45874

19660

VOLT_PM_10

58981

6553

VOLT_0_01

45874

32767

VOLT_0_1

45874

32767

VOLT_0_5

45874

32767

VOLT_0_10

58981

32767

11

MA_PM_1

58981

6553

12

MA_PM_5

39321

26214

13

MA_PM_10

45874

19660

14

MA_PM_20

58981

6553

16

MA_0_1

58981

32767

17

MA_0_5

39321

32767

18

MA_0_10

45874

32767

19

MA_0_20

58981

32767

20

MA_4_20

58981

38010

22

PT_50

1)

1)

23

PT_100

1)

1)

24

PT_1000

1)

1)

26

POT_1K

2)

2)

27

POT_5K

2)

2)

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Reference guide

The RTD elements are automatically calculated based on


interpolation with values fetched from a predefined table.
The scaling parameters are therefore not adjustable.

The potentiometer signal types are automatically calculated


based on a conversion algorithm. The counts scaling
parameters is therefore not adjustable.

The Raw Value for a channel is the result of the sampling of the
analogue to digital converter. By using the scaling parameters the
Scaled Value is calculated, and from this value the raw percent
value is calculated ( 100.00). The Scaled Value is used as input
to the 2 nd order butterworth filter to produce the Filtered Value.

6.3.6

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Counter input tag items

Parameter Name

Type

Adjust-able

Function

Enable Alarm Low

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable
alarm

Enable Alarm Low


Low

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable
alarm

Enable Alarm High

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable
alarm

Enable Alarm High


High

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable
alarm

Enable Event Low

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable
event

Enable Event Low


Low

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable
event

Enable Event High

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable
event

Enable Event High


High

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable
alarm

Limit Alarm Low Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm High

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm High


High

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Event Low Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event High

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event High


High

Number

Yes

Event limit

Filter time

Number

Yes

Time in 100 milliseconds

Filter index

Number

Yes

Counter input pin filter

221

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Parameter Name

Type

Adjust-able

Function

Time base

Number

Yes

Pulses per Eng.Unit

Number

Yes

Raw value

Number

No

Measured raw value


directly from counter

Scaled value

Number

No

Filtered value

Number

No

Measured value
scaled to technical
value
Filtered scaled
value

Dynamic dead band

Number

No

Counting time code:


ms=0:s=1:min=2:hr
=3
Pulses per engineering unit.

Parameters specific to counter inputs are described below.


Counter input parameters
Filter Index

When using the counter as an event counter it is possible to filter


the counter input signal with a digital filter in orderto avoid contact
noise to be counted. The Filter Index parameter specifies the
digital filter cut-off frequency according to the table below.
Filter Index

Cut--off frequency

1 HZ

5 HZ

10 HZ

50 HZ

100 HZ

500 HZ

1667 HZ

Time Base

When using the counter for frequency or time measurements the


Time base parameter specifies in which time unit the
measurement shall be calculated. The following values are
available:

Note

222

Time Base

Time unit

Milliseconds

Seconds

Minutes

Hours

Time base = 0 is not available when using the counter in frequency


mode.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Reference guide

Pulses per Eng.Unit

When using the counter in frequency measurement mode the


scaling algorithm need to know the number of pulses generated by
the counting sensor per engineering unit. This is specified in the
Pulses pr. Eng Unit parameter.
Pulses per engineering unit is for instance:
10 pulses per liter (flow rate).
120 pulses per revolution (engine RPM).
100 of pulses per knot (ship speed).
Counter input measured values
Raw Value

This value is read directly from the counter. In event counting


mode this value is the same as the scaled value.
Scaled Value

In event counting mode the scaled value is the same as the raw
value. In frequency, counting mode the scaled value is calculated
from the raw value by using the Pulses pr. Eng Unit and the time
base parameters. In time mode, only the Time base parameter is
used to calculate the Scaled value.
Filtered Value

The Scaled Value is used as input to the 2nd order butterworth filter
to produce the Filtered Value.

6.3.7

Digital input tag items

Parameter Name

Type

Adjust-able

Function

On delay

Number

Yes

Delay in 100 milliseconds

Off delay

Number

Yes

Delay in 100 milliseconds

Enable Alarm Low

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable alarm

Enable Alarm High

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable alarm

Enable Event Low

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable event

Enable Event High

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable event

Invert

Yes/no

Yes

Invert input status

Input value

Number

No

Input status before time


delay

Delayed input

Number

No

Input status after time


delay

Only the parameters specific to digital inputs are described below.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

223

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Digital input parameters


Delays

Digital input status is delayed to remove rapid irrelevant


transitions. The delay time specifies how long time the signal must
be stable before the new input value is accepted. The delay time is
specified in units of 100 milliseconds. The value 20 means a delay
of 2 seconds.
Invert

The input value can be used directly or inverted before use. Specify
YES to invert the input signal.
Input Values

Input status both before and after time delay is available.

6.3.8

224

Exhaust mean value tag items

Parameter Name

Type

Adjust-able

Function

Mean temperature
high high

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Enable alarm high

Yes/no

Yes

Alarm enable/disable

Enable alarm high


high

Yes/no

Yes

Alarm enable/disable

Mean temperature
high

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Mean temperature
block

Number

Yes

Alarm blocking limit

Dev. temperature
high

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Dev. temperature
low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Cylinder 1 temp

Number

Yes

Temperature tagnumber ref.

Cylinder 2 temp

Number

Yes

Temperature tagnumber ref.

Cylinder 3 temp

Number

Yes

Temperature tagnumber ref.

Cylinder 4 temp

Number

Yes

Temperature tagnumber ref.

Cylinder 5 temp

Number

Yes

Temperature tagnumber ref.

Cylinder 6 temp

Number

Yes

Temperature tagnumber ref.

Cylinder 7 temp

Number

Yes

Temperature tagnumber ref.

Cylinder 8 temp

Number

Yes

Temperature tagnumber ref.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Reference guide

Parameter Name

Type

Adjust-able

Function

Cylinder 9 temp

Number

Yes

Temperature tagnumber ref.

Cylinder 10 temp

Number

Yes

Temperature tagnumber ref.

Cylinder 11 temp

Number

Yes

Temperature tagnumber ref.

Cylinder 12 temp

Number

Yes

Temperature tagnumber ref.

Cylinder 13 temp

Number

Yes

Temperature tagnumber ref.

Cylinder 14 temp

Number

Yes

Temperature tagnumber ref.

Cylinder 15 temp

Number

Yes

Temperature tagnumber ref.

Cylinder 16 temp

Number

Yes

Temperature tagnumber ref.

Dynamic alarm limit

Number

No

Deviation alarm limit

Mean Temp

Number

No

Calculated mean
temp

Exhaust mean value parameters


Mean Temp High High/Enable alarm High High

If the mean temperature high high enable is set to YES, the mean
temperature high high alarm is activated if the calculated mean
temperature increases above the mean temperature High high
limit.
Mean Temp High

The mean temperature high alarm is activated if the calculated


mean temperature increases above the mean temperature high
limit.
Dynamic deviation alarm limit

Alarm limit at current mean temperature.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

225

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Mean Temp block/Dev. Temp. high/Dev. Temp. Low

If the mean temperature falls below the mean temperature block


limit, all deviation alarms are inhibited. The Dev. Temp. low limit
defines the maximum allowed deviation from the mean
temperature for each cylinder when the mean temperature is equal
to the mean temperature block limit. The Dev. Temp high limit
defines the maximum allowed deviation from the mean
temperature for each cylinder when the mean temperature is equal
to the mean temperature high alarm limit. The actual deviation
alarm limit is a dynamical calculated alarm limit that each cylinder
uses for deviation alarm detection. The figure below gives a
graphical illustration of the different parameters.
Cylinder Exhaust
Temperature
_C

Alarm
Zone

600

500
dtH : Cylinder Exh. temp
Deviation high
limit at Mean temp
high limit

400

300

Alarm
Zone

200

dtL : Cylinder Exh. temp


Deviation low limit
at Mean temp low
limit

100

Engine Mean
Temperature
100

200

Alarms are Inhibited


in this area

300

400

mtB : Mean temp. al


arm
blocking limt

500

600

_C

mtH : Mean temp.


high alarm limt

Figure 134 Exhaust mean value


parameters.
Cylinder 1 16 temperature

The cylinder (1 16) temperature parameters are tag number


references for each cylinders temperature measurement. Only the
cylinder references that are in use are used for calculating the mean
temperature.

226

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Reference guide

Mean temperature

The mean temperature is calculated as an average of all the


cylinders specified in the cylinder temperature reference
parameters. Cylinder temperatures that are in instrument fail are
not used in the calculation.

6.3.9

Exhaust deviation tag items

Parameter
name

Type

Adjust-able

Function

Correction temp

Number

Yes

Correction temp

Cylinder temperature ref.

Number

Yes

This temperature tagnumber ref.

Normalized
temp

Number

No

Measured temperature
+ temperature correction

There has to be one exhaust deviation tag item for each cylinder.
This tag item checks the normalised cylinder temperature against
the deviation alarm limit calculated by the exhaust mean
temperature tag item and activates the exhaust deviation alarm if
the normalised temperature is outside the legal deviation range.
Exhaust deviation parameters
Correction temperature

Each cylinders correction temperature is calculated only on


request from the operator. This is normally done when the engine
is running in steady state at 100% load. The reason for using a
correction temperature is that all cylinders have their own normal
operating temperatures, which mostly are not equal to the engine
mean temperature. By Adding the correction temperature to the
real cylinder temperature, the cylinder temperature is normalised
so that the deviation alarm limits are valid for all cylinders. The
correction temperature is calculated in the following way:
Correction_temperature = Meantemp RealCylindertemp

Cylinder temperature reference

The cylinder temperature ref. parameter is a tag number reference


to the cylinders temperature.
Normalised Temp

The Normalised temperature is calculated in the following way:


Cylinder_normalised_temp = RealCylindertemp +
Correction_temp

This normalised cylinder temperature is again used for checking


against the deviation limits to generate the deviation alarm.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

227

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

6.3.10 Common submenu items


Parameter
Name

Type

Adjust-able

Tag type

Number

Yes

RIO channel type

Decimal point

Number

Yes

Fixed point location for tag


analoge value

External tag

Yes/no

No

Yes if tag is used by some


other tag

Text

No

Tags global name

Tag name

Function

Common submenu parameters


Tag type

The channel type is a code specifying how the input signal is


handled and scaled. There are 255 different codes available.
Decimal point

Technical process values are represented as a fixed-point value.


The number 234.23 is internally represented with a value of 23423
and a decimal point of 2. Note that control applications mostly
have decimal point 1.
Tag names

The External Tag parameter = YES means that this tag is used by
another module. Most control applications are externals. The tags
value will be automatically transmitted for external use. The Tag
Name parameter is the global tag name. These parameters can not
be changed from a Local Operator Station.

6.3.11 Alarm submenu items


Parameter
Name

228

Type

Adjust-able

Function

Alarm on delay1

Number

Yes

High/ low delay on (1


second)

Alarm off delay1

Number

Yes

High/ low delay off (1


second)

Alarm on delay2

Number

Yes

HighHigh/lowlow delay
on (1 second)

Alarm off delay2

Number

Yes

Highhigh/lowlow delay
off (1 second)

Inhibit on delay

Number

Yes

Inhibit delay on (1 second)

Inhibit off delay

Number

Yes

Inhibit delay off (1 second)

Inhibit tag

Number

Yes

Tagnumber to inhibit
this channel

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Reference guide

Alarm and inhibit deleays

There are separate parameters for alarm delay on and off, as well
as delay of inhibit on and off. When the conditions for alarm or
inhibit is changed, a timer is started. The new condition must be
stable for the time specified by the delay parameter before the new
alarm condition is accepted and an event is issued. Delays are
specified in seconds.
Inhibit parameters
Tag Number

Specifies the tag number to check status for. The specified tag
numbers external parameter must be set to activate the Process
Data Object (PDO) transmission on changes.

6.4

Engineers safety
The engineers safety (dead man) system is a system for engineer
fitness. When activated, the reset button must be pressed by the
engineer within predefined time period, if not, the system will
indicate Engineer fitness alarm.

6.4.1

Functions

Start, stop and reset from pushbuttons.


Control from the Remote Operator Station.
Warning light activated by relay.
Alarm horn activated by relay.
Range check of timers according to IMO rules.
When active, the system will activate a rotating light after expired
time delay. The engineer must now reset the system. If the system
is not reset within a new time period, the system will activate an
alarm. Reset can be pressed at any time. The system will typically
be activated from the Remote Operator Station by selected alarms
when running an unattended engine room.

6.4.2

Local control

The system is activated and de-activated manually by a


key-switch. The system can also be activated automatically from
the alarm system when an engine room alarm occurs during
unattended engine room. A number of reset push buttons are
located around the ship.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

229

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

6.4.3

Remote Operator Station control

When an alarm occur in bridge watch, the engineer safety handler


is activated. The timers are reset every time activated. The timers
are not reset by the command from Remote Operator Station, if
already running.

6.4.4

Parameters

Parameter
name

Type

Adj.

Function

Initial
value

Par.
ref.

Tag1: Start

Number

Yes

Start/on digital input


Tag reference

Tag1

Tag2: Stop

Number

Yes

Stop/off digital input


Tag reference

Tag2

Tag3: Reset

Number

Yes

Reset digital input Tag


reference

Tag3

Tag4: On
Watch

Number

Yes

Remote Operator Station Tag for telling the


Dead man system that
someone is set on
Watch

Tag4

Tag5: New
Alarm

Number

Yes

Remote Operator Station Tag for telling the


Dead man system that
a new alarm is activated.

Tag5

T1: Warning time

Number

Yes

Time from reset or start


until warning is activated

T2: Alarm
time

Number

Yes

S1: IMO
Compliant

Yes/no

Yes

20 Min

P1

Time from warning is


activated until alarm

150
Sec

P2

Enable check timers


according to IMO rules
for machinery dead
man system

Yes

B1

Tag 4 and 5 are used when the dead man handler is part of the Watch
Calling System at the Remote Operator Station. Then the tag
pointed to by tag4 is active when the Watch Calling System is set
to bridge watch. When an alarm occurs in bridge watch, the tag
pointed to by tag5 will be activated, and this will activate the dead
man handler in the same way as if tag1 was activated. Decimal
point is 0.

230

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

7 MAINTENANCE
7.1

Introduction
This chapter explains how to keep the system in good working
order and what to do if the system fails.
The following subjects are covered:
- Overview
- Unit replacement
- Preventive maintenance
- Troubleshooting Remote Operator Stations
- Troubleshooting Midi Operator Stations
- Troubleshooting Local Operator Stations
- Troubleshooting the Watch Calling System
- Troubleshooting Distributed Processing Units

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

231

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

7.2

Overview
This maintenance chapter is intended for trained maintenance
technicians or engineers with experience of electronic and digital
circuits, computers and electro mechanical design. The level of
information is based on Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems
maintenance philosophy: The onboard technical personnel shall,
with the help of the documentation and the systems built-in test
functions, be able to identify malfunctions, locate the fault, and
replace major parts, modules and components on a Line
Replaceable Unit (LRU) level. He/she will however not attempt
to repair the LRUs.

Note

7.3

Cleaning with abrasive material or strong chemical cleaning


solutions is not recommended as these may damage the system.

Unit replacement

WARNING

Turn power off before replacing any parts!

Note

DataChief C20 units are not field repairable. Any attempt will
void the warranty.
Package faulty units using the box from the replacement unit and
send it to Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems for repair.

Refer to page 271 for information on how to get in touch with us.

7.3.1

Recommended tools

Drawings of the installation.


Digital multimeter.
Sensor simulator.
Screwdriver for wire terminals: Flat 3 x 0.7 mm.
Screwdriver for screen termination board: Flat 7 x 1.0 mm.
Screwdriver Pozidriv: POZI #1.
Cable ties.

232

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

7.4

Preventive maintenance
7.4.1

General

Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems recommends the


followingpreventive maintenance routine for the DataChief C20
Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power
management:
Weekly: Clean all operator panels, and run the on-line lamp and
unit function tests. Clean all filters for units equipped with fans.
6-Monthly: Check cables and cable entrances, electrical
screw-terminals, fuse connections and plug connections.
Yearly: Check and if necessary calibrate the input sensors and
output actuators according to the manufacturers instructions.
The Classification Societies and/or the Ships Maintenance Plan
(or Sites Maintenance Plan) should be referred to for obtaining a
recommended preventive maintenance schedule for test of
measuring-points and the alarm-system.
Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems recommends that the operation
of each unit and its functions is checked after any major
maintenance. By major maintenance is understood the removing,
testing, calibrating and re-installing or replacement of pressure
sensors, temperature sensors etc. After this type of maintenance,
we recommend each unit to be re-commissioned according to the
instruction given in this manual.

7.4.2

Weekly maintenance

This maintenance routine applies to units equipped with lamp


and/or function test buttons. Pushing function test buttons will not
interrupt normal system operation. Do the following:
Remote Operator Stations

Each week do the following for each Remote Operator Station:


1
Clean the front of the panel and graphics display unit using
a clean cloth and a solution of warm, mild soapy water - not
too wet.
2
Push LAMP TEST.
- All alarm group and the SYSTEM FAILURE indicators
should be lit and the buzzer turned on for about five seconds.
- If the test fails, refer to the trouble shooting section.
3
If the Remote Operator Station is fitted with an external air
filter, clean it.
- Additional preventive maintenance procedures, if any to be
carried out as described in the manufacturers manual for
each unit.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

233

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Midi Operator Station

Each week do the following for each Midi Operator Station:


1

Clean the surface of the Midi Operator Station and display


screen. Wipe the surfaces with a clean damp cloth. For
heavier cleaning, use a clean, damp cloth which has been
dipped in a solution of a mild dish detergent and water.
Wring out firmly before wiping the unit. Never use cleaning
solutions containing spirit or alcohol.

Local Operator Stations

Each week do the following for each Local Operator Station:


1

Clean the front of the unit using a clean cloth and a solution
of warm, mild soapy water - not too wet.

Push TEST and then ENTER.


- All indicators should be lit and the buzzer turned on.

Push SOUND OFF.

- Use SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN to turn indicators


and buzzer on and off.
4
Push MENU UP to exit the test.
5

Push SELECT DOWN and ENTER.

Push each button and verify that the button function is


printed on the display.

Push TEST to exit.


- If the test fails, refer to trouble shooting section.

Watch Calling System

Each week do the following for each Watch Bridge and Watch
Cabin Unit:
1

Clean the front of the unit using a clean cloth and a solution
of warm, mild soapy water - not too wet.

Push LAMP TEST.

All indicators should be lit and the buzzer turned on. The
display (if any) should display configuration data.
- If the test fails, refer to the trouble shooting section.
- If one or more LEDs fail to illuminate or the buzzer is silent,
replace the unit.

Distributed Processing Units

The distributed processing units do not require weekly


maintenance.

234

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

7.4.3

6-monthly maintenance

Where applicable; check the following parts of the system each


6-month period:
1

Check cables and cable entrances for dammage to the cable.

Tighten all electrical screw-terminals.

Tighten all plug connections.

7.4.4

Yearly maintenance

Each year, check and if necessary calibrate the input sensors and
output actuators according to the manufacturers instructions. In
general, it is not necessary to re-calibrate sensors if the input signal
is correct. Compare the input signal to this system, with the input
signals on other systems or local gauges. Sensors can be calibrated
in two ways; by calibrating the sensor or the signal itself, or by
calibrating the signal using the software calibration tool built into
the DataChief C20. The calibration software is accessible from
the Tag Details menu on the Remote Operator Station, or from
the Local Operating Station when available.
Refer to the Classification Societies and/or the Ships Maintenance
Plan (or Sites Maintenance Plan) for obtaining a recommended
preventive maintenance schedule for test of measuring-points and
the alarm-system. The societies normally recommend a 3-monthly
to 6-monthly schedule.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

235

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

7.5

Troubleshooting Remote Operator Stations


7.5.1

How to use the Service console


program

Introduction

Caution

The Service console program should only be used by trained


personnel. Improper use may seriously degrade the performance
of the DataChief C20 system.
The main functions of Service console are:
Start Remote Operator Station(s).
Stop Remote Operator Station(s).
Copy databases containing the systems configuration data from
Remote Operator Station 1 to selected Remote Operator
Station(s).
Copy project specific software from Remote Operator Station
1 to selected Remote Operator Station(s).
Copy any selected files.
Back-up selected project data.
Restore project data from back-up files.
Install updates to the system software (service packs) to the
Remote Operator Stations.
Check the status of installed software in selected Remote
Operator Stations against Remote Operator Station 1

Note

236

When installing/copying files the Remote Operator Station copied


to must be stopped.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

Explanation to the System Information Display

To start the Service console program go to the System information


display dialog.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

237

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Explanation to the main dialog

The following two illustrations briefly explains the main functions


of the main dialog. Consult the operating procedures for step by
step procedures on how to use it.

238

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

239

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Explanation to the Backup dialog

Dialog to specify the type of files and destination for the back-up.

How to start Service console

At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:


1

Push the System Information Display button.

Select Service console.

Type in the password and push enter.


- The main Service console window is displayed.

How to stop Remote Operator Stations

When installing/copying files the Remote Operator Station copied


to must be stopped. At Remote Operator Station 1 do the
following:
1

Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select Remote


Operator Stations.

Push the Stop Station button.


- The selected Remote Operator Stations are stopped.

How to start Remote Operator Stations

After copying files into Remote Operator Station(s), restart it. At


the Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:
1

Use the trackball and trackball button to select Remote


Operator Stations.

Push the Start Station button.


- The selected Remote Operator Stations are started.

240

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

How to copy the database

The following describes how to copy the database from Remote


Operator Station 1 to selected Remote Operator Station(s). At
Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:
1
Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select Remote
Operator Station(s).
2

Push the Stop Stations button.

Push the Copy Database button.

- The database is copied into the selected Remote Operator


Station(s).
4
Push the Start Stations button.
How to copy project software

The following describes how to copy the project specific software


from Remote Operator Station 1 to selected Remote Operator
Station(s). At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:
1

Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select Remote


Operator Station(s).

Push the Stop Stations button.

Push the Copy Project SW button.

- The project specific software is copied into the selected


Remote Operator Station(s).
4
Push the Start Stations button.
How to copy files into Remote Operator Stations

The following describes how to copy files from Remote Operator


Station 1 to selected Remote Operator Station(s). At Remote
Operator Station 1 do the following:
1

Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select Remote


Operator Station(s).

Push the Stop Stations button.

Push the Copy Files button.

- The Select Files to Copy dialog is displayed.


4
Select the required files and push Open.
- The files are copied into the selected Remote Operator
Station(s).
5
Push the Start Stations button.
How to update differences

The following describes how to update file differences between


Remote Operator Station 1 and the selected Remote Operator
Station(s). At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

241

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select Remote


Operator Station(s).

Push the Stop Stations button.

Push the Update Diffs button.


- All files with differences from those in Remote Operator
Station 1 are copied into the selected Remote Operator
Station(s).

Push the Start Stations button.

How to back-up project data

The following describes how to back-up project data from Remote


Operator Station 1 either to a specified path on the hard disk or to
floppy disk. At the Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:
1

Push the Backup button.


- The Backup dialog is displayed.

Do one of the following:


* Select a group from the pull-down Filter menu or

* Select the relevant file types under Include.


If you want the back-up on floppy disk, insert a disk and push
to disks(A).

If you want the back-up to a different path than c:\Ros push


Advanced and type in the path.

Push the Make Backup button.


- The back-up is created as specified.

How to restore project data

The following describes how to restore project data to Remote


Operator Station 1 either from a specified path on the hard disk or
from floppy disk. At the Remote Operator Station 1 do the
following:
1

Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select all Remote


Operator Stations.

Push the Stop Stations button.

Push the Restore button.

- The Restore dialog is displayed.


4
If the back-up is on floppy disk insert it and select the files
to restore.
5

Push the Restore button.


- The files are restored as specified.

242

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

How to install service a service pack

The following describes how to install a service pack on your


DataChief C20. The service pack is installed on all Remote
Operator Stations simultaneously. At the Remote Operator Station
1 do the following:
1

Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select all Remote


Operator Station.

Push the Stop Stations button.

Push the Install button.

Select the file(s) to install.


- The service pack is unzipped and distributed to all Remote
Operator Stations.

Push the Start Stations button.

7.5.2

How to set up a Remote Operator


Station from an image file

Turn power to the Remote Operator Station off.

Put the CD with the Remote Operator Station image file CD


into the CD-ROM reader and the boot floppy disk into the
floppy-drive.

Turn power on.


- The image program will then guide you through the process
of restoring the software.

Note

If the hard disc has defects, it is not possible to restore the Remote
Operator Station from an image file.
How to set up the Local Area Network

Use 3 COM cards for all Local Area Network connections.


1

Install both cards before turning power on.


- This ensures that all Remote Operator Stations get the same
IRQ address for the same network card.
- This means that network cards for network A and B has the
same position on all Remote Operator Stations.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Connect a PC keyboard to the Remote Operator Station.

Push the Windows button, point to Settings and click


Control panel.

Click on Network.

Select Protocol tab.

243

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Confirm that Network Protocol is: TCP/IP Protocol

Click OK and OK again.

Close the Control panel window.

How to set the Remote Operator Station name

To set up a Remote Operator Station in a Network it needs a name.


To set up computer name do the following:
1

Connect a PC keyboard to the Remote Operator Station.

Push the Windows button, point to Settings and click


Control panel.

Click on Network.

Select Folder identification tab.

Type in the Remote Operator Station name.

- Remote Operator Stations use the following names: ROS1,


ROS2, ROS3 etc.
6
In Workgroup, type in ROS.
7

Click Apply, and then click OK and OK again.

Close the Control panel window.

How to set the IP address

To set up the Remote Operator Station for dual Local Area


Network, a specified IP address must be inserted for each LAN
card. Do the following to set the IP address:
1

Connect a PC keyboard to the Remote Operator Station.

Push the Windows button, point to Settings and click


Control panel.

Click on Network.

Select the Protocols tab.

Under Adapter select the Local Area Network card you


want to configure. One of these:

- [1] 3 Com Etherlink XL NIC (3C900B-COMBO)


- [2] 3 Com Etherlink XL NIC (3C900B-COMBO)
6
Tick off Specify an IP address.

244

Type in an IP address according to the table below.

Type in a Subnet Mask.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

IP--Address LAN A

IP--Address LAN B

ROS1

172.17.0.100

172.16.0.100

ROS2

172.17.0.101

172.16.0.101

ROS3

172.17.0.102

172.16.0.102

Subnet Mask

255.255.0.0

255.255.0.0

Click Apply, and then click OK and OK again.

10

Close the Control panel window.

7.5.3

How to shut down a Remote


Operator Station

To avoid malfunctions, follow this procedure:


1

Connect a PC keyboard to the Remote Operator Station.

Push the Windows button, point to and click Stop DCC20.

Push the Windows button, point to and click Shut Down.

Click OK.

Power will automatically shut off.

7.5.4

How to replace colour graphics


displays

A number of different types and sizes of colour graphics displays


using both CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) and flat panels can be used
with the DataChief C20. The display must how ever be able to
handle a screen resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels. Also consider that
the new display must fit into the space available. Do the following:
1

Make sure the colour graphics display is turned off.

Disconnect the power cable and then the data cable.

Remove the colour graphics display.

Place the new colour graphics display in the place of the old
one.

Connect the data cable and then the power cable.

Turn the colour graphics display on.


- Confirm that it is working correctly.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

245

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

7.5.5

How to replace printers

We recommend that the replacement printer is of the same make


and model as the old one. However a number of different printers
can be used with the DataChief C20. If you change the type of
printer used, a new printer driver must be installed in the PC
driving the printer. To do this follow the instructions provided with
the printer. Keep in mind that the new printer must fit into the space
available. Do the following:
1
Make sure the printer is turned off.
2
Disconnect the power cable and then the data cable.
3
Remove the printer.
4
Place the new printer in the place of the old one.
5
Connect the data cable and then the power cable.
6
Turn the printer on.
7
Print any log.
- Confirm that the printer is working correctly.

7.5.6

How to replace Operator Control


Panels

All Operator Control Panels are identical except for the labels
inside the pushbuttons. It is recommended to order replacement
panels with the labels for your configuration already installed. In
your order specify the ship name or yard and hull number.
It is possible to remove the labels from the defective unit and install
them in the new unit, but as this is difficult we do not recommend
it. Do the following:
1
Remove the mounting screws.
2
Lift the panel up.
3
Disconnect the power cable and then the three data cables.
4
Place the new panel in the place of the old one.
5
Connect the three data cables and then the power cable.
6
Put the panel back in its place.
7
Mount the screws securely.
8
Test that the Operator Control Panel is working correctly.

7.5.7

How to replace Remote Operator


Station PCs

Replacement PCs must be ordered from us specifying the ship


name or yard and hull number, and which of the Remote Operator
station the PC belongs to (ROS1, ROS2, etc.). We will then set up
the PC with your system configuration and the correct hardware
interfaces.

246

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

It is possible to configure a PC onboard. This how ever requires a


service or commissioning engineer. Any attempt to do this will
void the warranty.
Replacement

Shut the PC down and turn power off.

Disconnect the power cable and then the data cables noting
down exactly where each cable goes.

Remove all printed circuit boards in the card slots noting


down exactly where each card goes.

Place the new PC in the place of the old one.

Install the printed circuit cards in the same locations as in the


old PC.

Connect the data cables and then the power cable.

Turn the PC on.

7.5.8

How to install the Remote


Operator Station software

Use the following procedure when you have replaced the hard disk
or when you have re-installed Windows NT.
Note

Do not attempt this procedure unless you are very familiar with the
Windows operating system.
Before you start any action, verify that you have a disk image
CD-ROM marked DC60052.0x (x is the number of the software
version installed in your system) and a service pack located on a
set of floppy disks or a CD-ROM marked DC60052.
Install the disk image

The disk image is a CD-ROM containing the software that was


installed in your system at commissioning time. Do the
following:
1

Connect a standard PC keyboard to the Operator Control


Panel.

Insert the disk image CD-ROM, marked DC60052.0x.

On the monitor click Start, point to Shut Down, and select


Restart.

- The PC will restart booting from the CD-ROM. The program


EasyRestore will automatically start.
4
Answer Yes/OK to questions, and then let the program run.
- After about ten minutes you will be asked to restart the PC.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

247

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Answer Yes/OK.

Set the LAN address and computer name

Remote Operator Stations use the following computer names


and Local Area Network addresses:
Computer name

LAN IP address
Adapter 1/LAN A

LAN IP address
Adapter 2/LAN B

ROS 1

172.17.0.100

172.16.0.100

ROS 2

172.17.0.101

172.16.0.101

ROS 3

172.17.0.102

172.16.0.102

ROS 4

172.17.0.103

172.16.0.103

...
Do the following:
6

On the monitor click My Computer, and then click Control


Panel.

Double-click on Network, and then click the Protocols tab.

Click Properties, select each network adapter and set the IP


address according to the table above.

When finished, click OK.

10

Click the Identification tab, and then Change.

11

Modify the computer name to ROSn (where n is the number


of this Remote Operator Station), click OK.

12

Click OK again.

13

When asked to reboot, answer Yes.

- The Remote Operator Station will reboot.


14 If you experience problems with the desktop shortcuts for
Start-up DCC20, Shutdown DCC20, or RioLoad see
What to do if you have problems with desktop shortcuts
below.
Install the latest service pack

The service pack is located on a set of floppy disks or on a


CD-ROM marked DC60052. It consists of a number of
self-extracting zip files. As an example, service pack
DC60052.07.003 consists of the following files:
* DC60052_07_003_disk#1.exe
* DC60052_07_003_disk#2.exe
* DPU 3.02 disk #1.exe

248

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

* DPU 3.02 disk #2.exe


* DPU 3.02 disk #3.exe
* DPU 3.02 disk #4.exe
How to install the latest service pack is described under How to
use the Service console earlier in this chapter.
Copy ship specific files and databases

How to copy ship specific files and databases is described under


How to use the Service console earlier in this chapter.
Testing the Remote Operator station

Do the following to verify that the Remote Operator Station is now


working correctly:
15

Double-clicking the Startup DCC20 icon.

16

Verify that all items specified in the case ROSn section of


the startup script starts without error messages.

17

Verify that the CAN Interface Server (CIS) starts and loads
the new configuration data into all Distributed Processing
Units it is responsible for.

What to do if you have problems with desktop


shortcuts

When changing the computer name of a PC running Windows NT,


you may experience problems with shortcuts on the desktop, such
as Startup DCC20, Shutdown DCC20, or RioLoad. Typically,
when you double-click on an icon, nothing happens. To solve the
problem do the following for each problem icon:

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

18

Right-click on the shortcut, select Properties.

19

Select the Shortcut tab.

20

In the Target field,


C:\ROS\config\Bin\....

21

In the Start in field,


C:\ROS\config\Bin\....

replace
replace

\\ROS1\c

with

\\ROS1\c

with

249

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

7.6

How to install the Midi Operator Station

WARNING

The Midi operator Station is sealed and


contains no user serviceable parts. Opening the
unit will void the warranty. If the glass in the
screen breaks, be carefull not to cut yourself on
the sharp edges of the glass pieces.

7.6.1

Placement

Figure 135 Midi Operator Station mounting.


Determine the most suitable and convenient place for operation
after considering the following conditions:
* There is limited exposure to direct sunlight to avoid
overheating.

Refer to the requirements on page 44 for suitable ambiant


temperatures

* There is good ventilation and minimum vibration.


* The minimum distance to a magnetic compass is 500mm
(20).
* Sufficient space behind the unit is available to allow
proper cable connections to the rear panel connectors.

250

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

7.6.2

Cutout

For flushmount installations use the following cutout.

5
2. s
4pc

243
230

240

135
95

132
Figure 136 MOS 33 cutout drawing.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

251

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

7.6.3

Electrical connections

Power supply connection

* The internal voltage regulator will allow the Midi


Operator Station (MOS 33) to operate normally within
the power supply voltage range from 10 to 32 V DC. A
24 volt power supply is however recommended. The Midi
Operator Station is connected to external power through
the terminal list. The cable length between the terminal
list and the Midi Operator Station is approximately 2
meters. After connecting the cable to the power source,
push the plug as far as it will go into the nine pin
receptacle marked PWR on the rear of the cabinet and
turn the plugs coupling ring clockwise until it makes a
click.

MOS
33

Terminal list

Figure 137 MOS 33 connection drawing.


Fuse

Note

A 4.0 Amp slow fuse should always be installed to protect the unit.
CAN bus interface connection

* The CAN bus connection is also made through the


terminal list. Make sure to connect using the correct
polarity. Also make sure the end (CAN) terminator
supplied with the unit stays in place.

252

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

7.7

Troubleshooting Midi Operator Stations

WARNING

The Midi operator Station is sealed and


contains no user serviceable parts. Opening the
unit will void the warranty. If the glass in the
screen breaks, be carefull not to cut yourself on
the sharp edges of the glass pieces.

7.7.1

Troubleshooting checklist

Symptom
Check
No picture on display Check that the
screen.
supply voltage is
between 10 32
VDC.
Check fuse in power
cable fuse holder.
Picture appears on
the display screen,
but image is too dark
or too bright.
No normal picture or
key operation.

7.7.2
Note

Remedy
Faultfind supply
voltage.

Replace fuse. Use


slow type 4.0A slow.
Adjust light/ contrast.

Disconnect power
and connect power
again.
Replace unit.

How to replace Midi Operator


Stations

Never replace more than one Midi Operator Station at a time!


Do the following:
1
If the unit is flush mounted remove the corners.
2
Remove mounting screws.

Note

3
4
5

Lift the panel out.


Disconnect the cables.
Replace the unit.

6
7
8

Connect the cables.


Replace mounting screws securely.
Replace corners if these where removed.

Configuration can only be done at the master Remote Operator


Station.
9
10

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

On the Remote Operator Station, push System Info Display.


Use the up/down arrow keys to select Replace Modules and
push Enter.
- The prompt Enter Password is displayed.

253

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

11
Note

Type in the password: *****

For error detection and replacement purposes the Midi Operator


Station is treated as a DPU (Distributed Processing Unit).
12

Under DPUs with COMM error, select the failed Midi


Operator Station and push Install Replacement DPU.
-

- After a few moments the system indicates Successfully


Replaced DPU. The alarm related to the failing unit
disappears.
13

254

Confirm that the Midi Operator Panel is working correctly


thtrough operational use.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

7.8

Troubleshooting Local Operator Stations


7.8.1

Troubleshooting flow diagram

To troubleshooting the Local Operator Station use the following


flow diagrams to determine the problem:
Start LOS
troubleshooting

Yes

Is the
SYSTEM FAIL
indicator lit?

No

Check
24volt power input. Is
power OK?

Yes

No

Replace the fuse or


reset the circuit
braker.

Red

The wiring has


wrong polarity.
Correct the wiring.

Yes

Disconnect and then


reconnect power.

Check the
terminal board
inside the mounting
frame. Check LED
indicator?

Green

Dark

Does the
LOS
operate?

Replace the unit.

No

Yes

Check
the LOS again. Still
failed?

Yes

Contact us for assistance.

No

Does
the LOS operate?

No

END

Yes

Figure 138 Local Operator Station troubleshooting flow


diagram.
WARNING

Health hazard
If you remove the mounting frame to check inside, power must be
turned ON to check LED indicator, etc. Take care not to touch
exposed terminal boards and components!

Caution

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Against equipment damage

255

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

To protect the front of the panel when dismounted, place the panel
front downwards onto a soft cloth.

7.8.2

How to replace Local Operator


Stations

All Local Control Stations are identical, no configuration is


required. Do the following:
1

Remove the mounting screws.

Lift the panel up.

Unscrew and remove the left side cover plate.

Slide the top panel out.

Disconnect the cable.

Connect the cable for the new unit.

Slide it into place - be careful not to dammage the cable.

Mount the side cover and screws securely.

Test that the Local Operator Panel is working correctly.

7.8.3

How to recommision a Local


Operator Station

- No manual recommissioning is necessary after replacing a


Local Operator Station.
- The Local Operator Station will check the network and
establish contact with the available Distributed Processing
Units automatically.

256

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

7.9

Troubleshooting the Watch Calling System


7.9.1

Troubleshooting flow diagrams

The troubleshooting of the Watch Bridge and Watch Cabin Units


are identical. Use the following flow diagrams to determine the
problem:
Start Watch Calling
System troubleshooting

Yes
Is the
ROS working
correctly?

No

Troubleshoot the ROS.

No

Check the ROS interface


board to the CAN bus. If
OK, troubleshoot the
CAN network cables .

No

Troubleshoot the WBU/


WCU unit using the next
troubleshooting flow
diagram.

No

END

Yes
Check the mimic display
Watch Calling
configuration 1 of 2.

Yes
Do you have
communication with all
WBU/WCU units?

Yes
Does the
WBU/WCU panels
operate?

Yes
Check
the WCS again. Still
failed?

Yes
Contact us for assistance.

Figure 139 Watch Calling System troubleshooting flow


diagram.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

257

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Start WBU/WCU
troubleshooting

Yes

Is the
SYSTEM FAIL
indicator lit?

No

Check
24volt power input. Is
power OK?

Yes

No

Replace the fuse or


reset the circuit
braker.

Red

The wiring has


wrong polarity.
Correct the wiring.

Yes

Check the mimic


display Watch Calling
configuration 1 of 2.

Check the
terminal board
inside the mounting
frame. Check LED
indicator?

Green

Dark

Does the
WBU/WCU
operate?

Replace the unit.

No

Yes

Check
the WCS again. Still
failed?

Yes

Contact us for assistance.

No

Does
the WBU/WCU
operate?

No

END

Yes

Figure 140 Watch Bridge or Watch Cabin Unit troubleshooting


flow diagram.
WARNING

Health hazard
If you remove the mounting frame to check inside, power must be
turned ON to check LED indicators, etc. Take care not to touch
exposed terminal boards and components!

Caution

Against equipment damage


To protect the front of the panel when dismounted, place the panel
front downwards onto a soft cloth.

258

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

7.9.2

How to replace Watch Calling


units

There are two types of Watch Bridge Units and two types of Watch
Cabin Units. For each type all panels are identical exept for the
labels inside the pushbuttons. It is recommended to order
replacement panels with the labels for your configuration already
installed. In your order specify the ship name or yard and hull
number.
It is possible to remove the labels from the defective unit and install
them in the new unit, but as this is difficult we do not recommend
it.
Each On Duty engineer has a group of panels defined as
belonging to that engineer-position. These are the panels in
his/her cabin, office and in public areas. When an engineer is On
duty, each of these panels are in On Duty active mode.
Replacement

Remove the mounting screws.

Lift the panel up.

Unscrew and remove the left side cover plate.

Slide the top panel out.

Disconnect the cable.

Note down the LMT address for both the old and the new
unit.
- Each watch calling panel has a unique ID, called an LMT
address. This address is either found on a label placed on the
side of the panel and looks like this:

Figure 141 Label with LMT address


- The LMT address is placed at the bottom of the label, in this
case NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000008453.
- If this label is missing, there should be a smaller label placed
on the bottom of the panel or inside the panel looking like
this:

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

259

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Figure 142 Label with last part of LMT address


- The number written at the bottom of the label is last part of
the LMT address, in this case 8453, indicating that the LMT
address is NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000008453.
- If you have a watch calling panel with an LCD display, you
can also find the LMT address by pushing LAMP TEST
(power must be connected). The LMT address is displayed
in line 3 on the LCD display.
7
Connect the cable for the new unit.
8

Slide it into place - be careful not to dammage the cable.

Mount the side cover and screws securely.

Configuration

WARNING

The following should only be done by trained


personnel.

Note

Configuration can only be done from the master Remote Operator


Station.
10

Find the wcall.ini file using the the Windows Explorer.

- It is normally located in the C:\\Ros\Config\Database folder.


11 Double-click the file to open it using the Notepad.
12

Look for a section named Panels that looks something like


this:
[Panels]
Panel1=1,NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000005382
Panel2=2,NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000006165
Panel3=3,NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000006162

Figure 143 Figure 1.3 The panels section of the wcall.ini file.

260

13

Locate the LMT address for the panel you replaced.

14

Replace this LMT address with the LMT address of the new
panel.

15

Save the wcall.ini file.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

16

Copy the file to the other Remote Operator Stations as


follows:

Refer to page 240 for How to start the Service console.

Refer to page 241 for How to copy files into Remote Operator
Stations.

17

Each DataChief C20 Remote Operator Station must be


stopped and started again for the changes to take effect.

Refer to page 240 for How to stop the Remote Operator Stations.

Refer to page 240 for How to start Remote Operator Stations.

18

Test that the Watch Calling unit is working correctly

261

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

7.10 Troubleshooting Distributed Processing


Units

7.10.1 How to handle Distributed


Processing Units error codes
All Distributed Processing Units have Built In Self-Test. These
report errors to the Remote Operator Stations on the system
channel.
- The following table gives an overview of the error codes and
appropriate actions:

Error Error description


code

Action

49

RAM fail

Replace the module.

48

Transmitter overcurrent (RAi16


and C1 modules)

Check all channels for


high current load.

47

Fuse fail (RDi32 and C1 modules)

Check all inputs.

46

Printed circuit board temperature Check the ambient temhigh


perature.

45

Parameter flash memory failure

Reset the module and


try again. If failing again,
replace the module.

CAN 1 -- plug X8:


40

CAN controller busoff

39

CAN controller error status set

38

CAN controller overrun

37

Rx queue overrun

36

HP Tx queue overrun

35

LP Tx queue overrun

34

Transmit fault

Check CAN connections

CAN 2 -- plug X9:

262

30

CAN controller busoff

29

CAN controller error status set

28

CAN controller overrun

27

Rx queue overrun

26

HP Tx queue overrun

25

LP Tx queue overrun

24

Transmit fault

Check CAN connections

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

7.10.2 How to handle Distributed


Processing Units communication
errors
When the Remote Operator Station gives a communication error
for one of the Distributed Processing Units. Do the following:
1

Locate the Distributed Processing Unit.

Check LED power and status indicators.

Figure 144 LED power indicator. Green indicates that power is


available and red that the power has wrong polarity.

Figure 145 LED status indicators.


3

Read the status for each indicator above and check it against
the table below.
LED indicators
Run

Watch
dog

Info.

End Init.

Power

Green

Dark

Flashing
yellow

Green

Green

No application loaded

Dark

Red

Dark

Green

Green

Not initialised

Dark

Red

Dark

Dark

Green

Application
stopped

Dark

Red

Dark

Green

Green

Fault type:
Normal
operation

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

263

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Power has
wrong polarity

Dark

Dark

Dark

Dark

Red

No power

Dark

Dark

Dark

Dark

Dark

Follow the action for the fault you found as described below.

Normal operation

Indicators lit: Run (Green), Info. (flashing yellow), End Init.


(green) and Power (green).
- The unit seems to be working OK.
1

Check the cabling.

Restart the unit by turning power off and then on again.

It the Remote Operator Station is still reporting an error


replace the module. See procedure below.

No application loaded

Indicators lit: Watch Dog (red), End Init. (green) and Power
(green).
1

Return the item to us.

Not initialised

Indicators lit: Watch Dog (red) and Power (green)


1

Reload the application from a Remote Operator Station.

If the the same indicators are still lit, replace the module. See
procedure below.

Application stopped

Indicators lit: Watch Dog (red) and End Init (green)


1

Restart the unit by turning power off and then on again.

If the Watch Dog indicator is still lit replace the module. See
procedure below.

Power connected with wrong polarity

Indicators lit: Power (red)


1

Correct the power polarity and check again.

If the Power indicator is still red, replace the module. See


procedure below.

No power

Indicators lit: None

264

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

Check power supply and wiring.

If the power supply and wiring is OK, replace the module.


See procedure below.

7.10.3 How to start or stop Remote


Operator Stations
Caution

Only to be used by trained personnel. The functionality found


here will allow you to stop the complete Alarm and monitoring
system with process control and power management!
1

On the Remote Operator Station, push System Info Display.

Use the up/down arrow keys to select Start DC modules and


push Enter.

- The prompt Enter Password is displayed.


3
Type in the password.
- The following window is displayed.
4
From the list, select the Remote Operator Station you want
to start or stop.
5

Under Start/Stop Stations push the appropriate button.


- Run State will indicate the status of the selected unit.

Figure 146 Window for starting or stopping of Remote


Operator Stations.

7.10.4 How to configure a new DPU


channel
Use the following procedure to add an alarm channel to the
DataChief C20.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

265

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Find a DPU (Distributed Processing Unit) with a spare


channel of the correct type.

In the engine-room

Wire the sensor to the spare channel.

At the remote operator station

Push the System Info Display button.

Use the up/down arrow keys to select Unit Display (if not
already selected) and push Enter.
- The prompt Enter unit number: is displayed on the lower
left side of the colour graphics display.

Type in the number of the selected DPU and push Enter.


- The information about the selected DPU is displayed

Use the up/down arrow keys to select the spare channel.

Push the Tag details button.

Select the Advanced tag details tab using the trackball.

Select tag description.

10

Enter the commissioning password: *****

11

Push Enter.

12

Change the tag description to give it a relevant name for the


new alarm.

For analogue channels

13

Under the Advanced Tag Details tab change for example:


* Engineering unit type
* Engineering unit high
* Engineering unit low

14

Under the Tag Details tab change for example:


* Logs, delays and alarm limits as relevant.

266

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

Figure 147 Advanced tag details for an analog channel.

Figure 148 Tag details for an analog channel.


For digital channels

15

Under the Tag Details tab change for example:


* Logs and delays

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

267

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Figure 149 Advanced tag details for an digital channel.

Figure 150 Tag details for an digital channel.


Disable commissioning access

16
17

268

When finished push the System Info Display button.


Use the up/down arrow keys to select Commissioning and
push Enter.
- The prompt Enter 0 to disable commissioning access: is
displayed on the lower left side of the colour graphics
display.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Maintenance

18

Type in 0 and push Enter.


- Commissioning status changes from Yes to No.

7.10.5 How to replace Distributed


Processing Units
Note

Never replace more than one DPU unit at a time!


All DPUs look very similar. Make sure the replacement unit is of
exactly the same type as the failing unit. Type specification is
available on the label for each unit. Do the following:
1

Remove the screws for the termination bracket.

Disconnect all connectors.

Remove the mounting screws.

Figure 151 Electrical disconnection.

Figure 152 Mechanical disconnection.


4

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Install the replacement unit.

269

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

On the Remote Operator Station, push System Info Display.

Use the up/down arrow keys to select Replace Modules and


push Enter.
- The prompt Enter Password is displayed.

Type in the password: *****

Under DPUs with COMM error, select the failed unit and
push Install Replacement DPU.

- After a few moments the system indicates Successfully


Replaced DPU. The alarm related to the failing unit
disappears.
9

270

Confirm that the DPU is working correctly.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts

8 REPLACEABLE PARTS
8.1

Introduction
This chapter contains a list of spare parts available for the
DataChief C20 including part numbers. Not all parts are listed
her, only those defined as Line Replaceable Units (LRU) to be
changed by on-board maintenance personnel. Information on
configuration settings is also included.

8.2

How to get in touch with us


Should you need to get in touch with us for any reason use the
following addressing information:
Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems
Bekkajordet 8 A
P.O. Box 1009
N-3194 Horten, NORWAY
Telephone switchboard: +47 33 03 20 00
Telephone 24 hours service: +47 91 52 80 82
Fax: +47 85 02 80 82
E-mail for service: service@kmss.no
E-mail for spare parts: spares@kmss.no

8.3

8.4

Consumable spare Parts


Air filter for Remote Operator Station

2603925

PC fan for Remote Operator Station

3900282

Box printer paper 2500 sheet A4-size

1200002

MOS33 - Midi Operator Station

4403239

WBU - LCD type with 6 alarm groups

8100114

WBU - LED type with 16 alarm groups

8100131

WCU - LCD type with 6 alarm groups

8100138

WCU - LED type with 16 alarm groups

8100141

RAi-16 - Remote Analogue input module

8100148

RAi-10TC - Remote Analogue input thermo coupler

8100161

RDi-32 - Remote Digital input module

8100154

Modules

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

271

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

RDi-32a - Remote Digital input module

8100172

RAo-8 - Remote Analogue output module

8100153

RDo-16 - Remote Digital output module

8100155

RIo-C1 - Remote Input Output module

8100181

RIo-C2 - Remote Input Output module

8100182

RIo-C3-GP - Generator Protection

8100251

RIo-C3-GDCP - Generator & Diff. Current Protection 8100225

8.5

8.6

RIo-C4 - Generator Protection module

8100226

VCC 440 - Voltage Converter Controller module

8100242

dPSC - Dual Process Segment Controller

8100183

PSS - Process Segment StarCoupler

8100184

LOS - Local Operator Station

8100158

UPS SMPS 700 V 220vac/24vdc 28A

3800248

UPS 220vac / 24vdc 10 A for cabinet montage

3800334

UPS 220/220vac 50/60Hz 780VA Eltech, Pulsar

3800351

UPS 220/220vac 50/60Hz 1080VA Eltech, Pulsar

3800352

Plugs and accessories


4 Pole connector

3401038

5 Pole connector

3401191

6 Pole connector

3401039

8 Pole connector

3401192

9 Pole connector

3401289

11 Pole connector

3401193

12Pole connector

3401290

Cross connection link for power and CAN

3100295

Termination resistor 120 ohm

5100091

Other spare parts


Colour graphics display

A number of different types and sizes of colour graphics displays


can be used with the DataChief C20. The minimum requirements
to these are:

272

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts

Screen resolution:

1024 x 768 pixels

To order a replacement unit specify the following information:


Colour graphics display size (17, 19, 21 or bigger both CRT
and flat screen types are available).
Remote Operator Station computer

The personal computer unit forming part of the Remote Operator


Station is loaded with DataChief C20 system software and
configuration software unique for each vessel. To order a
replacement unit specify the following information:
Vessel name.
Ship yard name.
Hull number.
Where located on the ship

8.7

Configuration settings
There are no hardware configuration settings such as dip switches
for any of the modules.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

273

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

8.8

Drawings
This chapter contains drawings refered to in other parts of the
manual:
- Local Operator Station
- Midi Operator Station
- Watch Bridge Unit
- Watch Cabin Unit
- RAi-16 - Remote Analogue input module
- RAi-10TC - Remote Analogue input thermo coupler
- RDi-32 - Remote Digital input module
- RDi-32a - Remote Digital input module
- RAo-8 - Remote Analogue output module
- RDo-16 - Remote Digital output module
- RIo-C1 - Remote Input Output module
- RIo-C2 - Remote Input Output module
- RIo-C3 - Generator protection module
- dPSC - Dual Process Segment Controller

274

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts

Local Operator Station,


Watch Bridge Unit &
Watch Cabin Unit

Note:
Rotate end covers 180 deg. to change between flush and
wall mounting. Use countersunk head screws.

Mounting screws:
M5
Cable connections:
2.5 mm 2 screw terminals
Supply Voltage:
18 - 32 V DC
Consumption: 6W maximum
Unit weight: 1.4kg
Temperature range:
- 15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

275

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

MOS33 Midi Operator Station

Mounting
M5 M5
Mountingscrews:
screws:
Cable
through
plug plug
Cableconnections:
connections:
Through
Supply
18 -18
32-V32
DCV DC
SupplyVoltage:
Voltage:
Consumption: 10 10W
W maximum
Consumption:
maximum
Unit
weight:
1.5 kg
Unit weight:
1.0kg
Temperature
range:
-10 Deg.
C to
+50
Temperature range:
-15 Deg.
C to +70
Deg.
C Deg. C

276

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts

RAi--16 Remote Analogue input module

Note:
Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs when
replacing the unit - do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the reading
direction.

Mounting screws:
M5
Cable connections:
2.5 mm 2 screw terminals
Supply Voltage:
18 - 32 V DC
Consumption: 11W maximum
Unit weight: 2.0kg
Temperature range:
- 15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

277

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

RAi--10tc Remote Analogue input module

Note:
Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs when
replacing the unit - do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the reading
direction.

Mounting screws:
M5
Cable connections:
2.5 mm 2 screw terminals
Supply Voltage:
18 - 32 V DC
Consumption: 10W maximum
Unit weight: 1.8 kg
Temperature range:
- 15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C

278

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts

RDi--32 & 32a Remote Digital input module

Note:
Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs when
replacing the unit - do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the reading
direction.

Mounting screws:
M5
Cable connections:
2.5 mm 2 screw terminals
Supply Voltage:
18 - 32 V DC
Consumption: 10W maximum
Unit weight: 1.8kg
Temperature range:
- 15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

279

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

RAo--8 Remote Analogue output module

Note:
Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs when
replacing the unit - do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the reading
direction.

Mounting screws:
M5
Cable connections:
2.5 mm 2 screw terminals
Supply Voltage:
18 - 32 V DC
Consumption: 10W maximum
Unit weight: 1.5kg
Temperature range:
- 15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C

280

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts

RDo--16 Remote Digital output module

Note:
Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs when
replacing the unit - do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the reading
direction.

Mounting screws:
M5
Cable connections:
2.5 mm 2 screw terminals
Supply Voltage:
18 - 32 V DC
Consumption: 10W maximum
Unit weight: 2.0kg
Temperature range:
- 15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

281

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

RIO--C1 Remote Input Output module

Note:
Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs when
replacing the unit - do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the reading
direction.

Mounting screws:
M5
Cable connections:
2.5 mm 2 screw terminals
Supply Voltage:
18 - 32 V DC
Consumption: 12W maximum
Unit weight: 2.0 kg
Temperature range:
- 15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C

282

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts

RIO--C2 Remote Input Output module

Note:
Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs when
replacing the unit - do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the reading
direction.

Mounting screws:
M5
Cable connections:
2.5 mm 2 screw terminals
Supply Voltage:
18 - 32 V DC
Consumption: 10W maximum
Unit weight: 1.8 kg
Temperature range:
- 15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

283

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

RIO--C3 Generator protection

Note:
Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs when
replacing the unit - do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the reading
direction.

Mounting screws:
M5
Cable connections:
2.5 mm 2 screw terminals
Supply Voltage:
18 - 32 V DC
Consumption: 15 W maximum
Unit weight: 2.0 kg
Temperature range:
- 15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C

284

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts

RIO--C4 Generator monitoring and control

Note:
Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs when
replacing the unit - do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the reading
direction.

Mounting screws:
M5
Cable connections:
2.5 mm 2 screw terminals
Supply Voltage:
18 - 32 V DC
Consumption: 15 W maximum
Unit weight: 2.0 kg
Temperature range:
- 15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

285

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

VCC Voltage Converter Controller

Note:
Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs when
replacing the unit - do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the reading
direction.

Mounting screws:
M5
Cable connections:
2.5 mm 2 screw terminals
Supply Voltage:
18 - 32 V DC
Consumption: 10W maximum
Unit weight: 1.8kg
Temperature range:
- 15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C

286

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Replaceable parts

dPSC Dual Process Segment Controller

Note:
Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs when
replacing the unit - do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the reading
direction.

Mounting screws: M5
Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminals
Supply Voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
Consumption: 15W maximum
Unit weight: 1.6 kg
Temperature range: -15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

287

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

9 APPENDIX
9.1

Introduction
This appendix contains definitions, abbreviations and references
used in this document.
The following subjects are covered:
- Abbreviations
- References

288

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Appendix

9.2

Abbreviations
9.2.1
AC
BIST
CAN
CE
CD
CCR
dPSC
DC
DPU
ECR
EMC
EMD
GUI
IACS
IMO
I/O
IFH
IFL
IP
KMSS
LAN
LAS
LCD
LED
LOS
LRU
MCU
NC
NO
OCP
PC
PCB
PDO
PDS
PLC
PMS
PSS
RAi
RAi tc

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

General
Alternating Current
Built In System Test
Control Area Network
Communite Europeen
Compact Disc
Cargo Control Room
Dual Process Segment Controller
DataChief
Distributed Processing Unit
Engine Control Room
Electro Magnetic Compatibility
European union Maritime Directorate
Graphic User Interface
International Assocciation of Class Societies
International Maritime Organisation
Input/Output
Instrument Failure High alarm
Instrument Failure Low alarm
Ingress Protection
Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems
Local area Network
Local Alarm System
Liquid Crystal Display
Light Emitting Diode
Local Operator Station
Line Replaceable Unit
Main Computer Unit
Normal Closed
Normal Open
Operator Control Panel
Personal Computer
Printed Circuit Board
Process Data Object
Process Data Segment
Programmable Logic Controller
Power Management System
Process Segment Starcoupler
Remote Analogue Input unit
Remote Analogue Input unit for termo couplers

289

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

RAO
RDI
RDO
ROS
SGW
UMS
UPS
UTC
WBU
WCU

9.2.2

Remote Analogue Output unit


Remote Digital Input unit
Remote Digital Output unit
Remote Operator Station
System Gateway
Unmanned Machinery Space
Uninterruptible Power Supply
Coordinated Universal Time
Watch Bridge Unit
Watch Cabin Unit

Alarm list abbreviations

The following is a list of abbreviations used in alarm list in


Remote- and Local Operator Stations.
Analogue sensors

OffSc

Offscan alarm. Indicates that the input signal is not


checked for alarm situations and is not measured any
more.

Grad

Gradient alarm. The input signal is changing rapidly.

Low

Low alarm. When the input signal is lower than a set


limit.

Lo-Lo

Low-Low alarm. When the input signal is lower than


a set limit.

High

High alarm. When the input signal is higher than a set


limit.

Hi-Hi

High-High alarm. When the input signal is lower than


a set limit.

IFL

Instrument failure low alarm. Used for example when


a 4 to 20 mA current loop is giving less than 4 mA.

IFH

Instrument failure high alarm. Used for example when


a 4 to 20 mA current loop is giving more than 20 mA.

Inhib

Inhibit. The input signal has been inhibited to avoid


unnecessary alarms such as when the main engine is
stopped.

Digital sensors

290

OffSc

Offscan alarm. Indicates that the input signal is not


checked for alarm situations.

Open

The switch is open, such as valve open

Closed

The switch is closed, such as valve closed

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Appendix

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Short

The wiring to the sensor has a short-circuit

Broken

The wiring to the sensor has a open-circuit

Inhib

Inhibit. The input signal has been inhibited to avoid


unnecessary alarms such as when the main engine is
stopped.

291

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

9.3

References
DataChief C20
Alarm and monitoring system
Instruction manual
Document number: AD-0376
Item number: 0400150
DataChief C20
Alarm and monitoring system with process control
Instruction manual
Document number: AD-0378
Item number: 0400152
DataChief C20
Alarm and monitoring system with power management
Instruction manual
Document number: AD-0379
Item number: 0400153
DataChief C20
Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power
management
Instruction manual
Document number: AD-0377
Item number: 0400151

292

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Instruction manual

Blank page

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

293

294

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

________________________________________________________________________________________________

DataChief C20 Instruction manual


Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management

________________________________________________________________________________________________

DataChief C20 Instruction manual


Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management

________________________________________________________________________________________________

DataChief C20 Instruction manual


Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management

________________________________________________________________________________________________

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

Blank page

Document printing instructions


This page and all pages hereafter are not part of
the manual and should not be printed!

The whole document including the front page is a


single PDF-file with the document number AD-0377.

Print the front page in colour.

The rest of the document should be printed in black


& white, 2-sided printing.

References is the last section that is part of the


document, after that there is various useful
information not normally printed.

The sheet before this one contains labels for the


spine of binders.

The following page(s) containing TAGS is used for


internal document updating purposes only.

Tags - DO NOT PRINT!


Kilde: Library I7 Ansvar: Kjell Grntoft
Dokument historie:
01.02.2002 released
Brukt:
AD-0377 DataChief C20
reg.no
bok
Version: Ingen
Andre attributter i bruk: Ingen
DataChief C20 AMS
Denne siden innehloder alle tags som er brukt i manualen.
1 Functional description
2 Getting started
3 Operating information
4 Reference guide
5 Maintenance
6 Replaceable parts
7 Appendix

Filnavn

Niv

Tag

Kommentar

c20_funcdes_01 Introduction

c20_funcdes_02 MOS tech spec.

Intro

c20_getstrt_01

Introduction

ROS

c20_getstrt_02

Understanding the Remote Operator Station


display.

c20_getstrt_03

Access levels MOS

Functional description
Intro

Getting started

Alarm and monitoring system


Intro

c20_operate_01 Introduction

ROS

c20_operate_02 How to access the

Watch Calling configuration.


3

c20_operate_03 How to enable resetting


of counters

c20_operate_04 How to display system


information

c20_operate_05 How to change time


zone

c20_operate_06 How to change tag


parameters for an analogue channel

c20_operate_07 How to change tag


parameters for a digital
channel

c20_operate_08 How to set the intervall


for selected points log

c20_operate_09 How to change tag


parameters

c20_pcs_01

Introduction

c20_pms_01

Introduction

c20_refguid_01

Introduction

c20_refguid_02

Exhaust mean value tag


items

c20_maint_01

Introduction

c20_maint_02

How to start Service


console

c20_maint_03

How to copy files into


Remote Operator Stations.

c20_maint_04

How to stop Remote


Operator Stations

c20_maint_05

How to start Remote


Operator Stations

Process control system

Power management system

Reference Guide
Intro

Maintenance
Intro

Replaceable parts
Intro

c20_parts_01

Introduction

c20_append_01 Introduction

Appendix
Intro